Ricoh Aficio MP C305SP Field Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Ricoh Manuals
  4. All in One Printer
  5. AFICIO MP C305SP
  6. Field service manual

Ricoh Aficio MP C305SP Field Service Manual

Gr-c1, machine codes: d117/d118
Hide thumbs Also See for Aficio MP C305SP:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual See also: Service Manual, User Manual
Model GR-C1
Machine Codes: D117/D118
Field Service Manual
28 Dec, 2011

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Ricoh Aficio MP C305SP

Summary of Contents for Ricoh Aficio MP C305SP

  • Page 1 Model GR-C1 Machine Codes: D117/D118 Field Service Manual 28 Dec, 2011...

  • Page 3: Important Safety Notices

    Important Safety Notices Responsibilities of the Customer Engineer Customer Engineer Maintenance shall be done only by trained customer engineers who have completed service training for the machine and all optional devices designed for use with the machine. Reference Material for Maintenance •...

  • Page 4: Power

    • The aim of these components is to prevent the products, which are heavy in weight, from toppling as a result of people running into or leaning onto the products, which can lead to serious accidents such as persons becoming trapped under the product. (U.S.: UL60950-1, Europe: EN60950-1) Therefore, removal of such components must always be with the consent of the customer.

  • Page 5: During Maintenance

    During Maintenance General • Before you begin a maintenance procedure: 1) Switch the machine off, 2) Disconnect the power plug from the power source, 3) Allow the machine to cool for at least 10 minutes. • Avoid touching the components inside the machine that are labeled as hot surfaces. Safety Devices •...

  • Page 6: Lithium Batteries

    Lithium Batteries • Always replace a lithium battery on a PCB with the same type of battery prescribed for use on that board. Replacing a lithium battery with any type other than the one prescribed for use on the board could lead to an explosion or damage to the PCB.

  • Page 7: After Installation, Servicing

    After Installation, Servicing Disposal of Used Items • Never incinerate used toner or toner cartridges. • Toner or toner cartridges thrown into a fire can ignite or explode and cause serious injury. At the work site always carefully wrap used toner and toner cartridges with plastic bags to avoid spillage before disposal or removal.

  • Page 8: Special Safety Instructions For Toner

    Special Safety Instructions for Toner Accidental Physical Exposure • Work carefully when removing paper jams or replacing toner bottles or cartridges to avoid spilling toner on clothing or the hands. • If toner is inhaled, immediately gargle with large amounts of cold water and move to a well ventilated location.

  • Page 9: Toner Disposal

    Toner Disposal • Never attempt to incinerate toner, used toner, or empty toner containers (bottles or cartridges). Burning toner can explode and scatter, causing serious burns. • Always wrap used toner and empty toner bottles and cartridges in plastic bags to avoid spillage. Follow the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such items.

  • Page 10: Health Safety Conditions

    Health Safety Conditions 1. Never operate the machine without the ozone filters installed. 2. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified types at the proper intervals. 3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort.
  • Page 11 • Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. • WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Optics Housing Unit section.

  • Page 12: Symbols, Abbreviations And Trademarks

    Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations are as follows: See or Refer to Clip ring Screw Connector Clamp E-ring Short Edge Feed Long Edge Feed Trademarks ® ® ®...

  • Page 13: Table Of Contents

    TABLE OF CONTENTS Important Safety Notices...........................1 Responsibilities of the Customer Engineer....................1 Customer Engineer..........................1 Reference Material for Maintenance....................1 Before Installation, Maintenance........................1 Shipping and Moving the Machine.....................1 The Aim of Anti-tip Components and Precautions................1 Power..............................2 Installation, Disassembly, and Adjustments..................2 Special Tools............................2 During Maintenance............................3 General..............................3 Safety Devices............................3 Organic Cleaners..........................3...
  • Page 14 Machine Configuration............................26 Machine Configuration..........................26 Main Unit.............................26 Controller Options..........................27 Overview................................29 Component Layout ............................29 Paper Path ..............................31 With all options...........................31 Drive Layout..............................32 2. Installation Installation Requirements..........................33 Environment..............................33 Machine Level..............................34 Machine Space Requirements........................34 Machine Dimensions...........................35 Power Requirements............................35 Mainframe Installation.............................37 Installation Flow Chart..........................37 Accessory Check............................38 Component List............................38 Installation Procedure..........................39 Tapes, Retainers and Toner Bottles....................39...
  • Page 15 Component Check............................58 Installation Procedure..........................58 1-Bin Tray Unit (D574)............................61 Components Check.............................61 Installation Procedure..........................62 Platen Cover (D607)............................70 Component Check............................70 Installation Procedure..........................70 ARDF (D606)..............................74 Accessory Check............................74 Installation Procedure..........................74 Copy Data Security Unit (D640)........................78 Component Check List..........................78 Installation..............................78 User Tool Setting..........................80 Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870)...................82 Component Check............................82 Installation Procedure..........................83 Mechanical Counter Installation (only for NA)..................85...
  • Page 16 Installation Procedure..........................109 For Installing the Tray Heater in D573...................110 For Joining the Mainframe with the Optional Paper Feed Unit.............114 Joining Two Optional Paper Feed Units..................118 IC Card Reader (External Option).......................120 Component Check.............................120 Installation Procedure..........................121 When installing in a machine that does not have the 1-bin tray unit...........121 When installing in a machine that has a 1-bin tray unit..............123 Controller Options............................127 Overview..............................127...
  • Page 17 Check All Connections..........................151 3. Preventive Maintenance Maintenance Tables............................153 PM Parts Settings............................154 Before Removing the Old PM Parts or Yield Parts..................154 After installing the new PM parts......................154 Preparation before operation check......................154 Operation check............................155 4. Replacement and Adjustment Beforehand..............................157 Special Tools..............................158 Image Adjustment............................159 Scanning..............................159 Scanner sub-scan magnification.....................159 Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration..............160...
  • Page 18 Front Cover..............................172 Upper Left Cover............................174 Left Cover..............................175 Rear Cover..............................177 Rear Right Cover............................178 Exhaust Filter..............................180 Inner Cover..............................181 Operation Panel............................182 Touch Panel Position Adjustment......................185 Scanner................................186 Scanner Unit..............................186 ARDF Cover Open / Close Sensor......................188 Carriage Unit HP Sensor...........................189 Scanner Motor............................191 Carriage..............................193 Reinstalling the Carriage........................196 Laser Optics..............................199 Caution Decal Location..........................199 Laser Units..............................199...
  • Page 19 SP Setting after Changing the Paper Transfer Roller..............225 ITB Contact Sensor............................225 Paper Transfer..............................227 Paper Transfer Contact Sensor.........................227 ID Sensor..............................229 After installing a new ID sensor board....................231 Drive................................232 Drive Unit..............................232 Paper Transport Motor..........................232 Development Motor (CMY) / Drum Motor (CMY) / Drum Motor (K)..........235 Fusing Motor..............................235 Toner Supply Motors (CMYK).........................236 Tray Lift Motor............................239...
  • Page 20 Friction Pad..............................261 Registration / Paper Feed Sensor......................262 Paper End Sensor............................263 Paper Tray Bottom Plate HP Sensor......................264 By-pass Feed Roller...........................265 By-pass Feed Unit............................270 By-pass Tray..............................272 By-pass Feed Paper Sensor........................273 By-pass Paper Size Sensor........................276 By-pass Feed Clutch..........................277 By-pass Feed Bottom Plate HP Sensor.....................279 Paper Exit................................281 Paper Exit Unit............................281 Paper Exit Sensor............................283...
  • Page 21 ARDF Unit..............................315 When installing the ARDF........................316 ARDF Rear Cover............................317 Original Feed Unit.............................317 Pick-up Roller.............................318 Feed Roller..............................318 Friction Pad..............................320 DFRB................................321 ARDF Top Cover Sensor/ Original Set Sensor..................321 ARDF Drive Motor.............................321 White Plate..............................324 When installing the white plate.......................325 Registration Sensor............................325 5. System Maintenance Service Program Mode..........................327 SP Tables..............................327 Enabling and Disabling Service Program Mode..................327...
  • Page 22 SP3-XXX (Process).............................401 Main SP Tables-4............................425 SP4-XXX (Scanner)............................425 Main SP Tables-5............................434 SP5-XXX (Mode)............................434 Main SP Tables-6............................491 SP6-XXX (Peripherals)..........................491 Main SP Tables-7............................493 SP7-XXX (Data Log)..........................493 Main SP Tables-8............................529 SP8-XXX (Data Log2)..........................529 Main SP Tables-9............................580 Input Check Table.............................580 Copier..............................580 Output Check Table..........................583 Copier..............................583 Printer Service Mode..........................586 SP1-XXX (Service Mode).........................586 Scanner Service Mode..........................595...
  • Page 23 Error Message Table........................607 Reboot/System Setting Reset........................609 Software Reset............................609 System Settings and Copy Setting Reset....................609 System Setting Reset.........................609 Copier Setting Reset.........................610 Controller Self-Diagnostics...........................611 Overview..............................611 Downloading Stamp Data..........................613 NVRAM Data Upload/Download......................614 Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card..................614 Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM....................614 Address Book Upload/Download......................616 Information List............................616 Download..............................616...
  • Page 24 Procedure..............................628 File Names of the Saved SMC Lists......................630 Error Messages............................631 6. Troubleshooting SC Tables...............................633 Service Call Conditions..........................633 Summary............................633 SC Code Classification........................634 SC1xx: Scanning............................636 SC 2xx: Exposure............................640 SC3xx: Image Processing – 1........................644 SC3xx: Image Processing – 2........................645 SC4xx: Image Processing - 2........................650 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing........................653 SC6xx: Communication..........................664 SC7xx: Peripherals............................672...
  • Page 25 Dark Vertical Line on Prints........................714 White Horizontal Lines or Bands......................715 Missing Parts of Images..........................715 Dirty Background............................715 Partial CMY Color Dots..........................716 Dark Irregular Streaks on Prints........................716 CMY Color Irregular Streaks........................716 Ghosting..............................716 Unfused or Partially Fused Prints......................717 Image Skew...............................717 Background Stain............................718 No Printing on Paper Edge........................718 Image not centered when it should be....................718 Jam Detection..............................719 Paper Jam Display.............................719...
  • Page 26 3. Duplex + Combine:........................731 How to calculate the paper reduction ratio ..................732 INDEX ................................733...

  • Page 27: Product Information

    1. Product Information Specifications See "Appendices" for the following information: • Specifications • Supported Paper Sizes • Software Accessories • Optional Equipment...

  • Page 28: Machine Configuration

    1. Product Information Machine Configuration Machine Configuration Main Unit Item Machine Code Remarks D117 D117: Gr-C1 SPF Main Unit [B] D118 D118: Gr-C1 SP Paper Feed Unit PB-1050 [A] D573 Up to 2 can be stacked 1 Bin Tray BN1010 [D] D574 NA/Asia Standard ARDF DF1030 [E]...

  • Page 29: Controller Options

    Machine Configuration Handset Type C5502 (Only for D645(NA) Requires the Fax Option. NA) [C] Controller Options Item Machine Code Remarks Fax Option Type C305 [B] D649 Only for D118 Only for machines equipped with a fax unit. Fax Connection Unit Type D D657 *This unit will be released in the near future.
  • Page 30 1. Product Information IEEE1284 Interface Board Type A B679 D377-01 (NA) Wireless LAN Unit Type J/K [F] D377-02 (EU) One from these four cards can be (IEEE 802.11a/g, g) D377-19 (Specified installed at the same time. countries) File Format Converter Type E [F] D377-04 Gigabit Ethernet Board Type A [F] G874...

  • Page 31: Overview

    Overview Overview Component Layout...
  • Page 32 1. Product Information 1. Toner Bottle [K] 2. Toner Bottle [C] 11. PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit) 3. Toner Bottle [M] 12. LDU 2 (for Magenta, Yellow) 4. Toner Bottle [Y] Unit 5. Image Transfer Belt Unit 13. Polygon Mirror Motor 2 6.

  • Page 33: Paper Path

    Overview Paper Path With all options [1]: Standard Paper Feed Tray (Tray 1) [2]: Standard Paper Exit Tray [3]: 1 Bin Tray (Option) [4]: ARDF (NA/Asia Standard, EU/China Option) [5]: Duplex Unit [6]: By-pass Tray [7]: One-tray Paper Feed Unit (Option) [8]: One-tray Paper Feed Unit (Option)

  • Page 34: Drive Layout

    1. Product Information Drive Layout [1]: Scanner Drive Motor [2]: Development Clutch (Black) [3]: Drum Drive Motor (Black) [4]: Drum Drive Motor (Color) [5]: Development Motor (Color) [6]: Paper Feed Clutch [7]: By-pass Tray Bottom Plate Lift Cam Drive Clutch [8]: Paper Transport Motor [9]: By-pass Feed Clutch [10]: Duplex Transport Clutch...

  • Page 35: Installation

    2. Installation Installation Requirements Environment 1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F) 2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH 3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight) 4. Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more 5.

  • Page 36: Machine Level

    2. Installation Machine Level Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") Machine Space Requirements • This machine, which uses high voltage power sources, can generate ozone gas. High ozone density is harmful to human health. Therefore, the machine must be installed in a well-ventilated room.

  • Page 37: Machine Dimensions

    Installation Requirements Put the machine near the power source with the clearance shown above. Machine Dimensions [A]: 621 mm [D]: 150 mm [B]: 540 mm [E]: 505 mm [C]: 150 mm [F]: 498 mm Power Requirements • Insert the plug firmly in the outlet. •...
  • Page 38 2. Installation • 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 5 A 2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: NA: 108 V (120 V-10%) - 138 V (127 V+8.66 %) EU/AA: 198 V (220 V-10%) - 264 V (240 V+10 %) Taiwan: 99 V (110 V -10%) –...

  • Page 39: Mainframe Installation

    Mainframe Installation Mainframe Installation Installation Flow Chart This flow chart shows the best procedure for installation.

  • Page 40: Accessory Check

    2. Installation Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of these accessories. Component List Description Q’ty Power Supply Cord Decal - Emblem Decal - Machine Code Decal - Function Key Label – Function Key Decal - Fax Hidden Cover (EU only) Decal - Paper Tray Decal - Note for Main Power Off Decal - Main Switch...

  • Page 41: Installation Procedure

    Mainframe Installation Installation Procedure Put the machine on the optional paper tray unit first if you install an optional paper feed unit at the same time. Then install the machine and other options. • Keep the shipping retainers after you install the machine. You may need them in the future if you transport the machine to another location.
  • Page 42 2. Installation 2. Open the ARDF cover (D117) [A] or platen cover (D118). 3. Remove all the tapes and the retainer (protective paper) [B] on the exposure glass. 4. Open the front door [A].
  • Page 43 Mainframe Installation 5. Pull out all protection seals [A] on the drums straight out towards the front. • Do not attempt to pull out tape [B] at this time.
  • Page 44 2. Installation 6. Close the front door. 7. Remove the paper tray [A]. 8. Reopen the front door and remove the waste toner bottle [A].
  • Page 45 Mainframe Installation 9. Remove the tape [A] on the lever. 10. Set the lever [B] to the upright position. 11. Set the waste toner bottle.
  • Page 46 2. Installation 12. Shake each toner bottle [A] eight or ten times. 13. Install each toner bottle [A] in the machine. The black end, with the label, must go in first, towards the rear of the machine. 14. Close the front door.

  • Page 47: Paper Tray

    Mainframe Installation 15. Connect the power cord to the machine. 16. Set the paper tray. 17. Turn on the main power. 18. The machine will start the initial settings automatically. This takes about 5 minutes. 19. Wait until the initial settings are terminated and “Ready” is shown on the operation panel. •...

  • Page 48: Decals

    2. Installation Decals 1. Attach the decal [A] and the machine code decal [B] to the front door and the scanner front cover of the machine, if the decal is not attached. 2. Attach the correct paper tray number and size decals to the paper trays. •...

  • Page 49: Settings For @Remote Service

    Mainframe Installation Specifies if the counting method used in meter charge mode is based on developments or prints. SP5-045-001 "0": Developments NOTE: You can set this one time only. You cannot change the setting after you have set it for the first time.
  • Page 50 2. Installation 3. Confirm the Request number, and then click [EXECUTE] with SP5816-203. 4. Check the confirmation result with SP5816-204. Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround Succeeded Request number error Check the request number again. Communication error (proxy Check the network condition. enabled) Communication error (proxy Check the network condition.
  • Page 51 Mainframe Installation Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround Other error See "SP5816-208 Error Codes" below this. Request number confirmation Processing… Please wait. executing 8. Exit the SP mode. SP5816-208 Error Codes Cause Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround Obtain a Request Number Inquiry, registration attempted -12002 before attempting the Inquiry or without acquiring Request No.

  • Page 52: Language Selection

    2. Installation Cause Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround -2385 Other error -2387 Not supported at the Service Center -2389 Database out of service -2390 Program out of service Two registrations for the same Check the registration -2391 mainframe condition of the mainframe Error Caused by -2392 Parameter error Response from...
  • Page 53 Mainframe Installation French German Italian Spanish Dutch Norwegian Danish Swedish Polish Portuguese Hungarian Czech Finnish Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Russian Greek Korean Catalan Turkish Brazilian • The last three digits of the SP number (from 002 to 006) show the order in the menu shown on the operation panel display.

  • Page 54: Registration Of Languages Other Than The Defaults

    2. Installation Registration of languages other than the defaults 1. Enter the SP mode. 2. Execute an SP from SP5-009-002 to 006. 3. Select a language from the SP mode menu. For example, if “Dutch” should be registered as the first language, execute SP5-009-002, and select “8”...
  • Page 55 Mainframe Installation 4. Press [Select Icon to Add]. 5. Press [Application].
  • Page 56 2. Installation 6. Press [Facsimile]. 7. Press [Select Destination].

  • Page 57: External Usb Keyboard (External Option)

    Mainframe Installation 8. Press a [Blank] to set a location for the fax icon. 9. Press [Exit] on the “Add Icon” screen to end the fax icon addition. 10. Press [Exit] on the “Edit Home” screen. 11. Press [Exit] on the “User Tools/Counter/Enquiry” screen. 12.
  • Page 58 2. Installation • The external keyboard that is available in this machine is principally for the Windows OS. However, no compatibility check is done, and there is no warranty. 2. Enter the SP mode and set SP5075-001 to ON (1) (USB keyboard). 3.

  • Page 59: Transporting The Machine

    Mainframe Installation Transporting the Machine The following should be done before transporting the machine. 1. Move the ITB lock lever down to the shipping position. This moves the ITB away from the K PCDU. 2. Do SP 4806-001 to move the scanner carriage from the home position. This prevents dust from falling into the machine during transportation.

  • Page 60: Paper Feed Unit (D573)

    2. Installation Paper Feed Unit (D573) Component Check Confirm that you have the accessory indicated below. Description Q’ty Installation Procedure (for service person) Installation Procedure • Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the installation procedure.
  • Page 61 Paper Feed Unit (D573) 3. Set the copier on the paper feed unit. • When installing a second paper feed unit, place it on the first paper feed unit. Then place the copier on the pair of paper feed units. 4.
  • Page 62 2. Installation • The paper tray number and size sheet is in the accessory box of the main machine. 6. Load paper into the paper tray(s) and set the side fences and end fence(s). 7. Adjust the registration for each tray ( p.159).

  • Page 63: 1-Bin Tray Unit (D574)

    1-Bin Tray Unit (D574) 1-Bin Tray Unit (D574) Components Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty 1-Bin Tray Unit Tray Binding Screw (M3 x 6) Screw (M3 x 10) Grounding plate Front Right Cover*1 Left Cover*1 Rear Upper Cover*2 Rear Upper Right Cover*2...

  • Page 64: Installation Procedure

    2. Installation *1 To replace the existing cover *2 Additional cover Installation Procedure • Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. All tapes.
  • Page 65 1-Bin Tray Unit (D574) 2. Rear cover [A] ( x 13) 3. Rear right cover [B] ( x 3) 4. Left cover [C] ( x 1) 5. Scanner rear cover [D] ( x 2). 6. Three harnesses [A] and a flat cable [B] ( x 4).
  • Page 66 2. Installation 7. Scanner unit [A] ( x 5) 8. Front right cover [B] ( x 1) 9. Attach the mounting frame junction [A] (M3x10: x 2) 10. Reinstall the ferrite core [B] at position .
  • Page 67 1-Bin Tray Unit (D574) 11. Attach the mounting frame [A] (M3x10: x 8) • Install the screws in this order: 12. Attach the 1-bin tray unit [A] (M3x10: x 5) 13. Connect the connector of the 1-bin tray unit to CN527 and then fix the harness ( x 1, x 3) 14.
  • Page 68 2. Installation • Install the blue screw at the very last. • Install the screws at the front side while the operation panel is flat. 15. Install the 1-bin tray [A]. 16. Attach the front right cover [E] (from the accessories, not the original cover) (M3 x 10: x 1).
  • Page 69 1-Bin Tray Unit (D574) 20. Connect the connectors of the harnesses [A]. Then route the harnesses [A] and the flat cable [B]. Finally, connect the connector of the flat cable [B] ( x 1, x 4). • The flat cable [B] should go through the ferrite cores [C]. •...
  • Page 70 2. Installation 21. Attach the grounding plate [A] (Upper: (blue) [B] x 1, Lower: x 1 (existing) [C]) 22. Attach the rear right cover [A] ( x 3). 23. Attach the rear upper right cover [B] (M3x10: x1). 24. Attach the left cover [C] (from the accessories, not the original cover) (M3x10: x 2).
  • Page 71 1-Bin Tray Unit (D574) • Pay extra attention when reattaching the rear cover [E] to avoid catching the harnesses. 28. Reassemble the machine. 29. Turn on the main power switch of the machine, and check the 1-bin tray unit operation.

  • Page 72: Platen Cover (D607)

    2. Installation Platen Cover (D607) Component Check Installation of this unit requires the following components. Other components included in this kit are not used for installation on this machine. Description Q'ty Platen Cover Platen Sheet Stud Screws Installation Procedure • Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. 1.
  • Page 73 Platen Cover (D607) 2. Remove the scanner rear cover [A] ( x 2). 3. Mount the platen cover [A] on the copier as shown.
  • Page 74 2. Installation 4. Secure the stud screw [A]. 5. Reinstall the scanner rear cover removed in step 2. 6. Open the platen cover 7. Place the platen sheet [A] on the exposure glass. 8. Line up the rear left corner of the platen sheet flush against corner [B] on the exposure glass. 9.
  • Page 75 Platen Cover (D607) 11. Press the surface of the platen sheet gently to attach it securely on the platen cover.

  • Page 76: Ardf (D606)

    2. Installation ARDF (D606) Accessory Check Confirm that you have the accessories indicated below. Description Q’ty Platen sheet Stud screw Screw (Unused) Installation Procedure • Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Remove the strips of tape on the ARDF.
  • Page 77 ARDF (D606) 2. Remove the scanner rear cover [A] ( x 2). 3. Remove the harness cap [B]. 4. Mount the ARDF [A] on the copier as shown.
  • Page 78 2. Installation 5. Secure the stud screw [A]. 6. Secure the ground cable [B] ( x 1). 7. Attach the clamp [C]. 8. Connect the I/F cable [D] to the connector. 9. Push the excess I/F cable into the interior of the ARDF to prevent the I/F cable from sagging. 10.
  • Page 79 ARDF (D606) 12. Place the platen sheet [A] on the exposure glass. 13. Line up the rear left corner of the platen sheet flush against corner [B] on the exposure glass. 14. Remove the protection seals [C]. 15. Close the ARDF. 16.

  • Page 80: Copy Data Security Unit (D640)

    2. Installation Copy Data Security Unit (D640) Component Check List Installation of this unit requires the following components. Other components included in this kit are not used for installation on this machine. Call-outs Descriptions Q’ty Copy data security unit board Bracket for the board Bracket for the machine attachment Screws...
  • Page 81 Copy Data Security Unit (D640) 1. Attach the copy data security unit board [1] to the bracket [2] ( [4] x 2) 2. Rear cover ( p.177) B: CN111...

  • Page 82: User Tool Setting

    2. Installation 3. Attach the bracket [3] to the machine using the existing screw [A]. • The Bracket [3] and the controller board are screwed together. 4. Attach the copy data security unit board with bracket [A] to CN111 ( [4] x 2).
  • Page 83 Copy Data Security Unit (D640) • The machine will issue an SC165 error if the machine is powered on with the ICIB-3 removed and the "Data Security for Copying" feature set to "ON". • The machine will issue an uncertain SC165 error if the machine is powered on with the defective ICIB-3 and the "Data Security for Copying"...

  • Page 84: Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870)

    2. Installation Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870) Component Check Installation of this unit requires the following components. Other components included in this kit are not used for installation on this machine. Description Q’ty Counter interface board Stud Harness Harness band Clamp...

  • Page 85: Installation Procedure

    Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870) Installation Procedure • Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Rear cover ( p.177) 2. Controller box cover ( p.298) 3. Install the four studs [A] in the controller box.
  • Page 86 2. Installation 4. Install the key counter interface board [A] on the four studs. 5. Connect the harness included in this kit to the connector [B] on the interface board. 6. Route the harness through the rear of the interface board, and then connect it to CN570 [A] (...

  • Page 87: Mechanical Counter Installation (Only For Na)

    Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870) 7. Band the harness at the point [B] with the harness band included in this kit to prevent interference with other harnesses. 8. Insert the clamp included in this kit at [D], and clamp the harness with the clamp to prevent interference with other harnesses.

  • Page 88: Installation Procedure

    2. Installation Description Q’ty Harness Installation Procedure • Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Remove the rear right cover ( p.178). 2. Remove the rear cover ( p.177). 3. Connect the harness to the mechanical counter. 4.
  • Page 89 Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870) 5. Route the harness [A] from the mechanical counter as shown above. 6. Connect the connector of the harness to the connector CN570. 7. Reassemble the machine.

  • Page 90: Hdd Option Type C305 (D656)

    2. Installation HDD Option Type C305 (D656) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q'ty HDD with the bracket Connection board with the bracket Power cable SATA cable Screws Clamp...

  • Page 91: Installation Procedure

    HDD Option Type C305 (D656) Installation Procedure 1. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 13) 2. Remove the scanner rear cover [B] ( x 1) 3. Pull out the paper tray. 4. Open the front door.
  • Page 92 2. Installation 5. Remove the left cover [A] ( x 2, hooks x 2). 6. Remove the controller box cover [A] ( x 6 ) • The screw [B] is different from other five screws.
  • Page 93 HDD Option Type C305 (D656) 7. Attach the connection board with the bracket [C] to the HDD with the bracket [D] ( x 2). 8. Connect the SATA cable [A] and the power cable [B] to the HDD ( x 2). 9.
  • Page 94 2. Installation 10. Remove two screws [A] on the controller board. These screws will be used for attaching the bracket. 11. With the HDD label side facing down, connect the connector of the HDD with the connection bracket to CN710 [B] ( x 1).

  • Page 95: Hdd Encryption

    HDD Option Type C305 (D656) 13. Secure the HDD with the connection bracket [A] ( x 2 included in this kit). 14. Attach the controller box cover to the machine, and install the screw [B] included in this kit and secure the HDD bracket with the controller box cover ( x 1 (included in this kit)).

  • Page 96: Data Overwrite Security

    2. Installation 6. Select the data to be carried over to the hard disk and not to be reset. To carry all of the data over to the hard disk, select [All data].To carry over only the machine setting data, select [File System Data Only].
  • Page 97 HDD Option Type C305 (D656) 8. Make a Sample Copy. 9. Check the overwrite erase icon. 10. The icon [B] changes to [C] when job data is stored in the hard disk. 11. The icon goes back to its usual shape [B] after this function has completed a data overwrite operation to the hard disk.

  • Page 98: Key Counter Bracket Type H (A674)

    2. Installation Key Counter Bracket Type H (A674) Component Check Installation of this unit requires the following components. Other components included in this kit are not used for installation on this machine. Description Q’ty Key counter attaching bracket Key counter bracket Key counter bracket cover Harness Screw (large)

  • Page 99: Installation Procedure

    Key Counter Bracket Type H (A674) Installation Procedure • Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Left cover ( p.175) 2. Rear cover ( p.177) 3. Cut out the part [B] from the left cover [A] and make two screw holes to attach the bracket. 4.
  • Page 100 2. Installation 6. Connect the connector of the harness [B] to the connector from the key counter bracket, and then insert the key counter bracket [A] into the attaching bracket obliquely from the upper right side ( x 1). 7. Pull out the harness [B] from below as shown above.
  • Page 101 Key Counter Bracket Type H (A674) 8. Attach the key counter bracket cover [A] to the key counter bracket ( (large) x 1). 9. Remove the scanner rear cover ( p.186) 10. Cut out the hole for the key counter harness to pass through the rear upper cover [A]. 11.
  • Page 102 2. Installation 15. Attach the clamps [A] to prevent the cable from sagging if necessary. • Prepare these clamps [A] yourself because they are not included in this kit.

  • Page 103: Anti-Condensation Heater (Mainframe)

    Anti-condensation Heater (Mainframe) Anti-condensation Heater (Mainframe) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q'ty Heater Heater Cover Screw Heater Power Switch Junction Harness Installation Procedure • Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
  • Page 104 2. Installation 1. Attach the heater cover [B] to the heater [A] as shown above ( x 1). 2. Pull out the paper tray. 3. Waste toner bottle ( p.214) 4. Left cover ( p.175) 5. Rear cover ( p.177)
  • Page 105 Anti-condensation Heater (Mainframe) 6. Left stay [A] ( x 3, x 1, x 10) • Never press the main frame from above when the left stay [A] is removed. Otherwise, the mainframe may be damaged.
  • Page 106 2. Installation 7. Pass the heater harness through the hole [B]. 8. Insert the spurs of the heater into the holes [C], and then install the tray heater [A] ( [D] x 1). • Use a short screwdriver to secure the screw [D]. If you have difficulty in securing the screw [D], carefully lay down the mainframe with its left side facing up.
  • Page 107 Anti-condensation Heater (Mainframe) 12. Store the connector [A] in the connector holder, then push the power switch [A] into the switch hole until you feel it click into place. 13. Cut out the switch hole [B] in the switch cover, then attach the cover [A] (Hooks x 2). 14.
  • Page 108 2. Installation 15. Route the junction harness as shown above. 16. Connect the connector [A] to CN103. 17. Store the connector [B] to the holder unless the optional PFU tray heater is installed.
  • Page 109 Anti-condensation Heater (Mainframe) 18. When the optional PFU tray heater will be installed: Pull out the connector [A] and its harness to the lower part of the machine. Then uncap the connector isolation cap in the optional PFU and connect the connector [A] to the uncapped connector ( p.108).

  • Page 110: Anti-Condensation Heater (Optional Unit)

    2. Installation Anti-condensation Heater (Optional Unit) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Other components included in this kit are not used for installation on this machine. For the Heater Installation: Description Q’ty Anti-condensation heater Harness with the isolation cap M4 x 10: Screw...

  • Page 111: Installation Procedure

    Anti-condensation Heater (Optional Unit) Description Q’ty Joint bracket (Front center) (only for the optional paper feed unit) Joint bracket (Rear) Joint bracket (Frame) (only for optional paper feed unit) M3 x 6: Screw M3 x 12: Screw Tapping screw Installation Procedure •...

  • Page 112: For Installing The Tray Heater In D573

    2. Installation For Installing the Tray Heater in D573 1. Pull out the tray [A] in the optional paper tray. 2. Rear cover [A] ( x 2)
  • Page 113 Anti-condensation Heater (Optional Unit) 3. Slide in the tray heater [A], and pass the heater harness [B] through the square hole [C]. 4. Install the tray heater [A] in the paper feed unit ( x 2).
  • Page 114 2. Installation A: For this tray heater B: For the mainframe C: For another optional tray heater 5. Connect the connector [A] to the tray heater connector, and cap the connector [C] with the isolation cap [D] unless there are two optional paper tray units installed ( x 1).
  • Page 115 Anti-condensation Heater (Optional Unit) 6. Route the harness [A], and clamp it as shown above ( x 2). • Pass the harness [A] behind the controller board harness [B] as shown above.

  • Page 116: For Joining The Mainframe With The Optional Paper Feed Unit

    2. Installation 7. Connect the connector [A] to the connector from the mainframe [C], and bend the part [B] of the harness and clamp it as shown above unless another paper feed unit is installed ( x 1, x 1). •...
  • Page 117 Anti-condensation Heater (Optional Unit) 2. Remove the rear cover [A] of the paper feed unit ( x 2). 3. Attach the jointing bracket (frame) [C] (Tapping x 1 [A], M3x6: x 1 [B]). 4. Attach the upper cover of the paper feed unit ( x 3).
  • Page 118 2. Installation 1: Rear 2: Front 3: Left 6. Remove the paper trays from the mainframe and the optional paper feed unit. 7. Remove two screws [A] on the rear panel of the mainframe. Keep these screws until the joint brackets (rear) are installed.
  • Page 119 Anti-condensation Heater (Optional Unit) 1: Front right 2: Left 3: Rear 9. Join the mainframe with the optional paper feed unit with four joint brackets [A] (front right), [B] (front left) and [C] (rear) (x 2). These brackets are secured with the following screws. [A]: M3 x 12 (included in this kit) [B]: M3 x 6 (included in this kit) [C] (Upper): Existing screws (x 2)

  • Page 120: Joining Two Optional Paper Feed Units

    2. Installation Joining Two Optional Paper Feed Units 1. Attach the joint bracket (front center) [A] to the paper feed unit that will be installed at the lowest position (Tapping x 2 (included in this kit)). 2. Put the optional paper feed unit on the paper feed unit that was fitted with the bracket [A] in step 1. 3.
  • Page 121 Anti-condensation Heater (Optional Unit) 1: Rear 2: Front center 4. Join the two paper feed units with two joint brackets (rear) [A] and one screw [B] (M3 x 6: (included in this kit)). 5. Reassemble the mainframe and the paper feed units. •...

  • Page 122: Ic Card Reader (External Option)

    2. Installation IC Card Reader (External Option) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q'ty IC Card Reader Bracket* Screw *The IC card reader attaching bracket has two types. One is for the base machine. The other is for machines that have the 1-bin tray unit.

  • Page 123: Installation Procedure

    IC Card Reader (External Option) Installation Procedure • Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. When installing in a machine that does not have the 1-bin tray unit 1. Remove the scanner unit ( p.186). 2. Remove the rear cover ( p.177).
  • Page 124 2. Installation 4. Route the USB cable [A] from the IC card reader as shown above ( x 5). 5. Pull out the USB cable from the rear of the machine. 6. Cut out the hole for the USB cable to pass through the rear upper cover [A].

  • Page 125: When Installing In A Machine That Has A 1-Bin Tray Unit

    IC Card Reader (External Option) 7. Pass the USB cable from the IC card reader through the hole in the upper rear cover, and then reassemble the machine. 8. Attach the clamps [A] to prevent the cable from sagging. 9. Connect the USB cable to the USB receptor at the left of the mainframe as shown above. Either receptor can be used.
  • Page 126 2. Installation 4. Attach the IC card reader [A] to the rear of the upper right cover [B] with the bracket [C] ( included in this kit). • The bracket [C] is different from that of the base machine. The bracket for the base machine cannot be used.
  • Page 127 IC Card Reader (External Option) 1. Route the USB cable [A] from the IC card reader as shown above ( x 6). 2. Pull out the USB cable from the rear of the machine in the same way as the installation on the base machine.
  • Page 128 2. Installation 4. Pass the USB cable from the IC card reader through the hole in the upper rear cover, and then reassemble the machine. 5. Attach the clamps [A] to prevent the cable from sagging. 6. Connect the USB cable to the USB receptor at the left of the mainframe as shown above. Either receptor can be used.

  • Page 129: Controller Options

    Controller Options Controller Options Overview • Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your hands before you handle SD cards, printed circuit boards, or memory boards. This machine has I/F card slots for optional I/F connections and SD card slots applications. After you install an option, check that the machine can recognize it (see "Check All Connections"...

  • Page 130: Sd Card Slots

    2. Installation SD Card Slots • Slot 1 (upper) is used for optional applications (e.g., Browser Unit, VM Card, PictBridge etc). • Slot 2 (lower) is used for service only (for example, updating the firmware). USB Connectors • These connectors (right and left) [B] are used for the Bluetooth interface unit or the external USB keyboard (external option) SD Card Appli Move Overview...
  • Page 131 Controller Options 2. Remove the cover [A] ( x 1). 3. Open the front door. 4. Remove the cover [A] ( x 1, hook x 1).

  • Page 132: Move Exec

    2. Installation 5. Insert the SD card into either socket [A], [B]. • The place [C] on the cover is for storing the SMC list when the machine is shipped. 6. Reassemble the machine. • The original application SD card should be kept in a safe place, for the following reasons: •...

  • Page 133: Undo Exec

    Controller Options 3. Insert the source SD card with the application program in SD Card Slot 2 (lower).The application program is copied from this source SD card. 4. Turn the main switch on. 5. Start the SP mode. 6. Select SP5-873-001 "Move Exec". 7.

  • Page 134: File Format Converter Type E

    2. Installation File Format Converter Type E • Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. You can only install one of the following interfaces at one time: (File format converter, IEEE 802.11a/g, g (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, Bluetooth). 1.
  • Page 135 Controller Options 2. Install the file format converter [A] into the slot and then fasten it with screws. 3. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. 4. Check or set the following SP codes with the values shown below. SP No.

  • Page 136: Ieee 1284 Interface Board Type A

    2. Installation IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A Installation Procedure • Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE 802.11a/g, g (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, File format converter).

  • Page 137: Ieee 802.11A/G, G Interface Unit Type J/K

    Controller Options 2. Install the interface board [A] into the slot (Knob-screw x 2 [B]). 3. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see "Check All Connections" at the end of this section). IEEE 802.11a/g, g Interface Unit Type J/K Installation Procedure •...
  • Page 138 2. Installation 1. Remove the slot cover [A] from the board slot ( x 2).
  • Page 139 Controller Options 2. Install the wireless LAN board [A] (Knob x 2) into the board slot. 3. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see "Check All Connections" at the end of this section).

  • Page 140: Up Mode Settings For Wireless Lan

    2. Installation 1: Rear 2: Left 4. Peel off the double-sided tapes on the Velcro fasteners [A], and then attach them [A] at the front left and rear of the machine. 5. Attach "ANT1" (having a black ferrite core) [B] to the rear of the machine. 6.

  • Page 141: Sp Mode And Up Mode Settings For Ieee 802.11A/G, G Wireless Lan

    Controller Options Region A (mainly Europe and Asia) Range: 1-13, 36, 40, 44 and 48 channels (default: 11) In some countries, only the following channels are available: Range: 1-11 channels (default: 11) Region B (mainly North America) Range: 1-11, 36, 40, 44 and 48 channels (default: 11) •...

  • Page 142: Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D

    2. Installation 5840-011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00). UP mode Name Function SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting. WEP Key Used to confirm the current WEP key setting. Used to show the maximum length of the string that can be WEP Mode used for the WEP Key entry.

  • Page 143: Vm Card Type T

    Controller Options 2. Insert the Bluetooth Interface adapter [A] into the USB connector (Either USB connector can be connectable). 3. Plug the power cable and turn on the power of the machine. 4. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see "Check All Connections" at the end of this section).

  • Page 144: Camera Direct Print Card Type K

    2. Installation 2. Insert the SD card (VM card) in SD slot 1 (upper) with its label face [A] to the rear of the machine. 3. Attach the SD-card slot cover, and then turn on the machine ( x 2). 4.
  • Page 145 Controller Options 1. Remove the SD-card slot cover [A] from the SD card slots ( x 1). 2. Insert the SD card (PictBridge) in SD slot 1 (upper) with its label face [A] to the rear of the machine. 3. Attach the SD-card slot cover, and then turn on the machine ( x 2).

  • Page 146: Sd Card For Netware Printing Type J

    2. Installation 4. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see "Check All Connections" at the end of this section). SD Card for Netware Printing Type J • Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. 1.

  • Page 147: Browser Unit Type H

    Controller Options 2. Insert the SD card (Netware Printing) in SD slot 1 (upper) with its label face [A] to the rear of the machine.. 3. Attach the SD-card slot cover, and then turn on the machine ( x 1). 4.
  • Page 148 2. Installation 1. Remove the slot cover [A] for SD cards ( x 1). 2. Turn the SD-card label face [A] of the browser unit to the rear of the machine. Then, push it slowly into SD slot 1 (upper) until you hear a click. 3.

  • Page 149: Browser Icon Addition

    Controller Options 4. Push the "User Tools" key. • If an administrator setting is registered for the machine, steps 5 and 6 are required. Otherwise, skip to step 7. 5. Push the "Login/ Logout" key. 6. Login with the administrator user name and password. 7.
  • Page 150 2. Installation 3. Press [Add Icon]. 4. Press [Browser]. 5. Press a [Blank] to set a location for the browser icon. 6. Press [Exit] to end the browser icon addition.

  • Page 151: Gigabit Ethernet Board Type A

    Controller Options Gigabit Ethernet Board Type A • Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. 1. Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 2).
  • Page 152 2. Installation 2. Install the gigabit Ethernet LAN board [A] (Knob [B] x 2) into the board slot. 3. Install the Ethernet connector and USB type B connector cover included in the Gigabit Ethernet board kit on the 100M bit LAN connector [C] and the USB connector type B [D].

  • Page 153: Check All Connections

    Controller Options 4. Attach the ferrite core [A] (included in the kit) to the Ethernet cable of the gigabit ethernet LAN card as shown above. 5. Check the operation of the Gigabit Ethernet Check All Connections 1. Plug in the power cord. Then turn on the main switch. 2.
  • Page 154 2. Installation...

  • Page 155: Preventive Maintenance

    3. Preventive Maintenance Maintenance Tables See "Appendices" for the following information: • Maintenance Tables...

  • Page 156: Pm Parts Settings

    3. Preventive Maintenance PM Parts Settings Before Removing the Old PM Parts or Yield Parts 1. Enter the SP mode. 2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004. 3. Set the following SPs to "1" before you turn the power off. Then, the machine will reset the PM counters automatically.

  • Page 157: Operation Check

    PM Parts Settings • Put the printout on the exposure glass. • Put 10 sheets of white paper on the test chart. This ensures the precise ACC adjustment. • Close the ARDF or the platen cover. • Press "Start Scanning" on the LCD. Then, the machine starts the ACC. 4.
  • Page 158 3. Preventive Maintenance...

  • Page 159: Replacement And Adjustment

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Beforehand • Before installing options, please do the following: • If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the lists of user- programmed items, and the system parameter list. •...

  • Page 160: Special Tools

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Special Tools Part Number Description Q'ty B645 5010 SD Card NOTE G021 9350 Loop-back Connector – Parallel * C401 9503 20X Magnification Scope A257 9300 Grease Barrierta – S552R 5203 9502 Silicone Grease G-501 A092 9503 C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set) B679 5100 Plug - IEEE1284 Type C...

  • Page 161: Image Adjustment

    Image Adjustment Image Adjustment Scanning Check the printing registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment before you do the following scanner adjustments. • Use C-4 test chart to do the following adjustments. Scanner sub-scan magnification A: Sub-scan magnification 1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations. 2.

  • Page 162: Scanner Leading Edge And Side-To-Side Registration

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration A: Leading Edge Registration 1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations. 2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration. Adjust the following SP modes if necessary. Standard: 0 ±...

  • Page 163: Ardf Sub-Scan Magnification

    Image Adjustment SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range SP6-006-003 Leading Edge Registration ± 5.0 mm SP6-006-007 Rear Edge Erase (Trailing Edge) ± 5.0 mm ARDF sub-scan magnification 1. Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations. 2.

  • Page 164: Side To Side

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Side to Side Adjusts the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station. Use SP mode (SP1-002) to adjust the side-to-side registration for the optional paper feed unit and duplex unit. Adjustment Standard • Leading edge (sub-scan direction): 3.25 ± 2.75 mm •...

  • Page 165: Erase Margin Adjustment

    Image Adjustment Erase Margin Adjustment • Adjust the erase margin C and D only if the registration (main scan and sub scan) cannot be adjusted within the standard values. Do the registration adjustment after adjusting the erase margin C and D, and then adjust the erase margin A and B. •...

  • Page 166: Printer Gamma Correction

    4. Replacement and Adjustment • Do "Auto Color Registration" as follows to do the forced line position adjustment. 1. First do SP2-111-3. 2. Then do SP2-111-1. To check if SP 2-111-1 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A message is displayed at the end.
  • Page 167 Image Adjustment Shadow (High ID) Levels 6 through 9 in the C4 chart 10-level scale ID max Level 10 in the C4 chart 10-level scale (affects the entire image density.) The higher the number in the range associated with the low ID, middle ID, Offset high ID, and ID max, the greater the density.
  • Page 168 4. Replacement and Adjustment Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard Adjust the offset value so that ID max: the density of level 10 matches that of level 10 on the C-4 (K, C, M, and Y) chart.
  • Page 169 Image Adjustment Adjust the offset value so that dirty background does not show Highlight (Low ID) (K) on the copy and the density of level 3 is slightly lighter than that of level 3 on the C-4 chart. - Text (Letter) Mode, Full Color - Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard...

  • Page 170: Printer Mode

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Adjust the offset value so that Shadow (High ID) (K) the density of level 8 matches that of level 8 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that dirty background does not show Highlight (Low ID) (K) on the copy and the density of level 3 is slightly lighter than that of level 3 on the C-4 chart.

  • Page 171: Color Skew Adjustment

    Image Adjustment 4. Select "Printer SP". 5. Select SP1-102-001. Then select the necessary print mode to adjust. 6. Choose SP1-103-1 to print out a tone control test sheet if you want to examine the image quality for these settings. 7. Adjust the color density with SP1-104. Compare the tone control test sheet with the C4 test chart. •...
  • Page 172 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Open the front door [A] and then remove the cover [B] ( x 1) 4. Close the front door [A] and execute “MUSIC” (SP2-111-002). [A]: Adjustment knob for Black [B]: Adjustment knob for Cyan [C]: Adjustment knob for Magenta [D]: Adjustment knob for Yellow...
  • Page 173 Image Adjustment • There are two knobs on each of the two LD units. • Clockwise: 90 degrees corresponds to changing the SP value by “+1” • Counterclockwise: 90 degrees corresponds to changing the SP value by “-1“ • A click is felt every 90 degree rotation of the knob. 5.

  • Page 174: Exterior Covers

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Exterior Covers Front Cover 1. Pull out the paper tray.
  • Page 175 Exterior Covers 2. Front lower cover [A] ( x 1) 3. Open the front cover. 4. Front cover [A] ( x 2, pins x 2)

  • Page 176: Upper Left Cover

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Upper Left Cover 1. Upper left cover [A] ( x 1)

  • Page 177: Left Cover

    Exterior Covers Left Cover 1. Pull out the paper tray.
  • Page 178 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Open the front cover and remove the left cover [A] ( x 2).

  • Page 179: Rear Cover

    Exterior Covers Rear Cover 1. Rear cover [A] ( x 13)

  • Page 180: Rear Right Cover

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Rear Right Cover 1. Open the duplex unit.
  • Page 181 Exterior Covers 2. Rear right cover [A] ( x 3) • Remove the rear right cover while pushing it downward.

  • Page 182: Exhaust Filter

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Exhaust Filter 1. Filter cover [A] 2. Remove the exhaust filter [A] from the filter cover.

  • Page 183: Inner Cover

    Exterior Covers Inner Cover 1. Scanner unit ( p.186) 2. Remove seven screws from the inner cover [A] ( x 7).

  • Page 184: Operation Panel

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Inner cover [A] ( x 4, x 7) Operation Panel 1. Scanner unit ( p.186) 2. Make the operation panel flat (see the following diagram).
  • Page 185 Exterior Covers 3. Front upper cover [A] ( x 1) 4. Upper right cover [A] ( x 1)
  • Page 186 4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Operation panel [A] ( x 3, x 5) 6. Rear cover ( p.177) 7. Disconnect the USB connector [A] and harness [B] (CN113) ( x 2).

  • Page 187: Touch Panel Position Adjustment

    Exterior Covers Touch Panel Position Adjustment • It is necessary to calibrate the touch panel at the following times: • When you replace the operation panel. • When you replace the controller board. • When the touch panel detection function does not operate correctly Do not use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu.

  • Page 188: Scanner

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Scanner Scanner Unit 1. Rear cover [A] ( x 13) 2. Open the duplex unit. 3. Rear right cover [B] ( x 3) 4. Upper left cover [C] ( x 1) 5. Scanner rear cover [D] ( x 2)
  • Page 189 Scanner 6. Disconnect four connectors ( x 4). 7. Front right cover [B] ( x 1) 8. Scanner unit [A] ( x 5)

  • Page 190: Ardf Cover Open / Close Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment ARDF Cover Open / Close Sensor 1. ARDF ( p.315) 2. Scanner front cover ( p.186 "Scanner Unit") 3. Scanner upper cover ( x 7)

  • Page 191: Carriage Unit Hp Sensor

    Scanner 4. ARDF open / close sensor (Hook x 3, x 1) Carriage Unit HP Sensor 1. ARDF ( p.315) 2. Scanner front cover ( p.186 "Scanner Unit") 3. Scanner upper cover ( p.188 "ARDF Cover Open / Close Sensor")
  • Page 192 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Move the carriage to the right. • Hold the carriage belt with the hand and move the carriage when moving the carriage. • Never hold the carriage itself.

  • Page 193: Scanner Motor

    Scanner 5. Remove one screw of the bracket ( x 1). 6. Remove the carriage HP sensor while lifting up the bracket slightly ( x 1, x 1, hook x 2). Scanner Motor 1. ARDF ( p.315) 2. Scanner front cover ( p.186 "Scanner Unit") 3.
  • Page 194 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Shield plate ( x 2) 5. Scanner motor with the bracket ( x 3, belt x 1)

  • Page 195: Carriage

    Scanner 6. Scanner motor ( x 1, x 2) Carriage 1. ARDF ( p.315) 2. Scanner front cover ( p.186 "Scanner Unit") 3. Scanner upper cover ( p.188 "ARDF Cover Open / Close Sensor")
  • Page 196 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Move the carriage to the right. • Hold the carriage belt with the hand and move the carriage when moving the carriage. • Never hold the carriage itself.
  • Page 197 Scanner 5. Bracket ( x 2) 6. Bracket ( x 2) 7. Disconnect the flat cable while lifting up the carriage shaft ( x 1).

  • Page 198: Reinstalling The Carriage

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 8. Carriage • Wipe off oil adhered disproportionately to the carriage after the carriage is replaced. • Never wipe off the oil on the shaft of the carriage. Reinstalling the Carriage Make sure that the flat cable of the carriage is correctly connected and routed referring to the following points.
  • Page 199 Scanner • The flat cable [A] must be connected straight, and not at an angle. • The flat cable is not sagging and does not drag on the bottom of the scanner unit [B]. • The flat cable is hooked at part [A] of the carriage.
  • Page 200 4. Replacement and Adjustment • Never connect the flat cable to the carriage connector obliquely. Otherwise, the BICU or the SCU may be damaged.

  • Page 201: Laser Optics

    Laser Optics Laser Optics • Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury. Caution Decal Location Caution decal is attached as shown below. •...
  • Page 202 4. Replacement and Adjustment 1. Open the front cover [A].
  • Page 203 Laser Optics 2. Paper exit tray [A] ( x 1, hook x 5)
  • Page 204 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Remove the screw, disconnect the connector, and release the stopper to remove laser unit 1 [A]. When you remove laser unit 2 [B], repeat this step.
  • Page 205 Laser Optics 4. Open the connector cover [A], release the lock and disconnect the flat cable. • Never touch the shield glass under the LD unit when replacing it. • Never connect the flat cable obliquely. Otherwise, the LD unit may be damaged.

  • Page 206: Adjustment After Ld Unit Replacement

    4. Replacement and Adjustment • Turn the adjuster [A] clockwise to move the mirror to the left side, or counterclockwise to move it to the right side. See the Color Skew Adjustment in the Image adjustment section for details (See below for details). Adjustment after LD unit replacement Do the following settings after replacing the laser unit.
  • Page 207 Laser Optics 2. Execute ‘MUSIC’ (SP2-111-002) and check the result for each color with the following SPs. • SP2-117-004 (Black) • SP2-117-002 (Cyan) • SP2-117-001 (Magenta) • SP2-117-003 (Yellow) 3. The color skew adjustment should only be executed if one or more of the above SP values is not within ±5.

  • Page 208: Ld Unit Cooling Fan

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 6. Rotate each knob [A] [B] [C] [D] corresponding to the value shown in SP2-117-001 to 004. See the note below for how to do this. • Examples: • If the SP value is +7, turn knob [A] 7 clicks clockwise,. •...
  • Page 209 Laser Optics 2. LD unit cooling fan [A] ( x 1)

  • Page 210: Image Creation

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Image Creation PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit) (K) 1. Waste toner bottle ( p.214) 2. Release the lock lever. 3. PCDU (K) [A] ( x 2, x 1)

  • Page 211: Pcdu (Cmy)

    Image Creation • Put the removed PCDU on a flat surface with a sheet of paper under it. • After replacing the PCDU, set the lock lever that was released in step 2. PCDU (CMY) The removal procedure of the PCDU (CMY) is same as for PCDU (K). However, it is not necessary to release the lock lever.
  • Page 212 4. Replacement and Adjustment 1: Tension released 2: Tension applied • Check that the ITB has no tension before PCDU (CMY) replacement. Otherwise, the ITB may be damaged. • The tension of the ITB can be released as follows. • Turn the pressure release screw [A] to the left, until the flat part of the half moon on the screw points to the right [1].

  • Page 213: Toner Transport Section

    Image Creation • Put the removed PCDU on a flat surface with a sheet of paper under it . Toner Transport Section 1. Toner supply motor (All colors) ( p.236)
  • Page 214 4. Replacement and Adjustment • After the toner supply motor is removed, secure four screws (as shown above) on the toner transport section to prevent toner from flying off. 2. Remove the toner bottles (all colors). 3. Toner supply unit ( x 8)

  • Page 215: Sp Setting After Replacing The Toner Transport Section

    Image Creation • Pull out the toner supply unit obliquely upward. • The black toner supply unit has no toner end sensor. 4. Remove the toner transport section. Toner transport section SP Setting after Replacing the Toner Transport Section The following SP settings are required after a toner transport section (the toner sub-hopper) is replaced. 1.

  • Page 216: Waste Toner Bottle

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Enter the SP mode. 3. Set the following SPs (New unit flag) to “1” depending upon the color of the replaced unit. • SP3-701-027 (Black) • SP3-701-028 (Cyan) • SP3-701-029 (Magenta) • SP3-701-030 (Yellow) 4. Set the following SPs (Toner supply flag) to “1” depending upon the color of the replaced unit. •...
  • Page 217 Image Creation 2. Open the front cover. 3. Remove the waste toner bottle. 4. Remove the five waste toner bottle caps (KCMY) [A] and install them on the waste toner inlets. The examples [A] in the upper photo are for black and cyan.

  • Page 218: Waste Toner Full Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Replace the waste toner bottle. Waste Toner Full Sensor 1. Remove the paper tray. 2. Open the front cover. 3. Remove the waste toner bottle ( p.214).
  • Page 219 Image Creation 4. Waste toner full sensor [A] ( x 1, hook x 2)

  • Page 220: Image Transfer

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Image Transfer ITB (Image Transfer Belt) Unit 1. All PCDUs ( p.209, p.208) 2. Open the duplex unit [A].
  • Page 221 Image Transfer 3. Release the tension spring [A] and the tension belt [B] (Hook x 1, x 1). 4. Release the lock levers and remove the fusing unit [A].
  • Page 222 4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Put a sheet of paper [A] on the duplex unit as shown above, with the short edge of the paper pointing towards the ITB unit. 6. Pull out the ITB unit [A] slightly.

  • Page 223: After Replacing The Image Transfer Belt Unit

    Image Transfer 7. Remove the ITB unit [A] while holding the right and left guides of the unit. After replacing the image transfer belt unit Do the following after replacing the ITB unit. 1. Enter the SP mode. 2. Set SP3-701-018 to “1” (This is the manual setting for the new unit detection). 3.
  • Page 224 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Transfer roller contact drive unit [A] ( x 3, x 2) 4. Cover [A] ( x 2)
  • Page 225 Image Transfer 5. ITB contact motor [A] ( x 2, gear x 1). 6. Paper transfer contact motor [A] ( x 2, gear x 2)

  • Page 226: Paper Transfer Roller

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Paper Transfer Roller 1. Open the duplex unit. 2. Remove the paper transfer roller [A] while pushing the knobs at both ends of the roller.

  • Page 227: Sp Setting After Changing The Paper Transfer Roller

    Image Transfer SP Setting after Changing the Paper Transfer Roller 1. Plug in and turn on the main power. 2. Enter the SP mode. 3. Set SP3-701-018 to “1”. 4. Exit from the SP mode. 5. Turn the main power off and on. ITB Contact Sensor 1.
  • Page 228 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. ITB contact sensor [A] (Hook x 2)

  • Page 229: Paper Transfer

    Paper Transfer Paper Transfer Paper Transfer Contact Sensor 1. Open the duplex unit.
  • Page 230 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Paper transfer roller ( p.224) 3. Cover [A] (Hook x 1) 4. Paper transfer contact sensor [A] ( x 1, hook x 2)

  • Page 231: Id Sensor

    Paper Transfer ID Sensor 1. ITB unit ( p.218) 2. Guide plate [A] ( x 2) 3. ID sensor bracket [B] ( x 1)
  • Page 232 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Remove four screws of the ID sensor [A] ( x 4). 5. ID sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1) • When cleaning the ID sensor, also wipe part [B] in step 4 with a cloth moistened with water.

  • Page 233: After Installing A New Id Sensor Board

    Paper Transfer • Do not use a dry cloth. Otherwise, the ID sensors may get dirtier due to static electricity. After installing a new ID sensor board Do the following adjustment after installing a new ID sensor board. 1. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine 2.

  • Page 234: Drive

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Drive Drive Unit 1. Toner transport section ( p.211) 2. Drive unit [A] ( x 6) Paper Transport Motor 1. Fusing motor ( p.235)
  • Page 235 Drive 2. Rear left handle [A] ( x 1) 3. Fusing drive motor bracket with the gears [A] ( x 2)
  • Page 236 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Harness guide [A] ( x 3, x 14) 5. Paper transport motor [A] ( x 3)

  • Page 237: Development Motor (Cmy) / Drum Motor (Cmy) / Drum Motor (K)

    Drive Development Motor (CMY) / Drum Motor (CMY) / Drum Motor (K) 1. HVPS (ITB) with the bracket ( p.239 "Duplex Clutch / By-pass Feed Clutch / Registration Clutch / Paper Feed Clutch") [A]: Development motor (CMY) [B]: Drum motor (CMY) [C]: Drum motor (K) 2.

  • Page 238: Toner Supply Motors (Cmyk)

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Move the rear right handle [A] out of the way, so that it does not interfere with the removal procedures ( x 3). 3. Move the harness guide [A] out of the way, so that it does not interfere with the removal procedures ( x 3, x 1).
  • Page 239 Drive 2. Toner supply motor unit [A] ( x 3 each) • Each toner supply motor unit can be removed in the same way. 3. Remove the gear [A] ( x 1 each).
  • Page 240 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Remove the shaft, gear and bearing ( x 2 each). 5. Toner supply motor [A] ( x 2 each)

  • Page 241: Tray Lift Motor

    Drive Tray Lift Motor 1. Drive unit ( p.232) 2. Tray lift motor [A] ( x 2, x 2, x 1) Duplex Clutch / By-pass Feed Clutch / Registration Clutch / Paper Feed Clutch 1. Paper transport motor ( p.232) 2.
  • Page 242 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. HVPS (ITB) with the bracket [A] ( x 3) 5. Grounding plate [A] ( x 2) 6. Gear cover and gear [B] ( x 1) 7. Paper transport unit [C] ( x 3, x 1)
  • Page 243 Drive 8. Paper transport unit cover [A] ( x 4) [A]: Duplex clutch [B]: By-pass feed clutch [C]: Paper feed clutch...

  • Page 244: Development Clutch

    4. Replacement and Adjustment [D]: Registration clutch 9. Each clutch ( x 1 each) Development Clutch 1. Drum motor (K) ( p.235) 2. Development clutch with the cover [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)
  • Page 245 Drive 3. Remove the development clutch from its cover [A].

  • Page 246: Fusing

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Fusing Fusing Unit • Turn off the main switch and wait until the fusing unit cools down before beginning any of the procedures in this section. The fusing unit can cause serious burns. • Basically, the entire fusing unit must be replaced when SC554-00 occurs. •...

  • Page 247: Fusing Upper Cover

    Fusing Fusing Upper Cover 1. Fusing upper cover ( x 4) Fusing Lower Cover 1. Fusing lower cover ( x 4)

  • Page 248: Fusing Entrance Guide Plate

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Fusing Entrance Guide Plate 1. Fusing entrance guide plate ( x 2) Thermostat 1. Fusing upper cover ( p.245) 2. Thermostat ( x 2)

  • Page 249: Fusing Thermistor

    Fusing • Never re-use a thermostat that has activated. Use a new thermostat for replacement. Fusing Thermistor 1. Fusing upper cover ( p.245) 2. Remove the fusing thermistor with the bracket [A], and then remove the fusing thermistor from the bracket ( x 2) Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistors...

  • Page 250: Pressure Roller

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Thermistor holder ( x 1) 3. Pressure roller thermistors ( x 1 each, x 1 each) Pressure Roller 1. Fusing upper cover ( p.245) 2. Fusing lower cover ( p.245) 3. Fusing entrance guide plate ( p.246) 4.
  • Page 251 Fusing 1: Front lower 5. Remove the discharge brush [A] ( x 1). 6. Remove the C-ring and bearing.

  • Page 252: Fusing Sleeve Belt Assembly

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 7. Remove the C-ring, pressure gear and bearing. 8. Pressure roller [A] Fusing Sleeve Belt Assembly 1. Fusing upper cover ( p.245) 2. Fusing lower cover ( p.245) 3. Fusing entrance guide plate ( p.246)
  • Page 253 Fusing 4. Separation plate [A] (Springs x 2) 5. Remove the fusing lamp harness ( x 3, short plate x 1) 6. Remove the six screws on the rear frame [A].
  • Page 254 4. Replacement and Adjustment 1: Right 7. Remove the right stay [A] ( x 2). 1: Right...
  • Page 255 Fusing 8. Remove two screws at the right. 1: Left 9. Remove the left stay [A] ( x 2). 1: Left 10. Remove two screws at the left.

  • Page 256: Fusing Entrance Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 11. Pull out the rear frame [A], and take out the fusing sleeve belt assembly [B]. Fusing Entrance Sensor 1. Open the duplex unit.

  • Page 257: Fusing Exit Sensor

    Fusing 2. Fusing entrance sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1) Fusing Exit Sensor 1. Paper exit unit ( p.281) 2. Fusing exit sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1, hook x 2)

  • Page 258: Thermopile

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Thermopile 1. Paper exit unit ( p.281) 2. Bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)

  • Page 259: Actions When Sc554-00 Occurs

    Fusing 3. Thermopile [A] ( x 1) Actions When SC554-00 Occurs Basically, the entire fusing unit must be replaced when SC554-00 occurs. However, it is possible to continue to use the old fusing unit when there is no damage found when you inspect the fusing unit in accordance with the flow chart shown below.

  • Page 260: New Fusing Unit Detection Fuse Replacement And Installation

    4. Replacement and Adjustment *1: a) Do not use SP 3-701-014 to reset the fusing unit counter manually when doing the above reset procedure for SC554-00. b) Do not open the door when doing the procedure in this flow chart (“SC reset failure”...
  • Page 261 Fusing 1: Rear 3. Remove the new fusing unit detection fuse [A] if the old blown fuse is attached ( x 1). 4. Connect the fuse connector, and insert the fuse into place from the upper side. 5. Reassemble the fusing unit. •...

  • Page 262: Paper Feed

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Paper Feed Paper Feed Roller (Standard Tray) 1. Pull out the paper tray. 2. Remove the bearing ( x 1). 3. Sub paper feed roller ( x 2)

  • Page 263: Friction Pad

    Paper Feed 4. Paper feed roller (Hook x 1) Friction Pad 1. Paper feed roller ( p.260) 2. Friction pad (Hooks x 2)

  • Page 264: Registration / Paper Feed Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Registration / Paper Feed Sensor 1. Open the duplex unit. 2. Pull down the guide plate [A]. 3. Sensor cover [B] ( x 2)

  • Page 265: Paper End Sensor

    Paper Feed 4. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 2) 5. Registration sensor [A] (Hook x 2) 6. Paper feed sensor [B] (Hook x 2) Paper End Sensor 1. Pull out the paper tray.

  • Page 266: Paper Tray Bottom Plate Hp Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Paper end sensor [A] ( x 1, hook x 2) Paper Tray Bottom Plate HP Sensor 1. Pull out the paper tray.

  • Page 267: By-Pass Feed Roller

    Paper Feed 2. Paper tray bottom plate HP sensor [A] ( x 1, hook x 2) By-pass Feed Roller 1. By-pass feed unit ( p.270) 2. Bracket [A] ( x 1)
  • Page 268 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Remove the e-ring [A] and bearing [B] at the front of the by-pass feed unit ( x 1, bearing x 1). 4. Remove the e-ring and the gear at the rear of the by-pass feed unit ( x 1, gear x 1).
  • Page 269 Paper Feed 5. Remove the bearing (bearing x 1). 6. Remove the e-ring at the front of the by-pass feed unit ( x 1).
  • Page 270 4. Replacement and Adjustment 7. Remove the e-ring at the rear of the by-pass feed unit ( x 1). 8. Move the front cam and rear cam inward while pushing down the bottom plate.
  • Page 271 Paper Feed 9. Remove the paper feed roller with the shaft from the front side. 10. Paper feed roller (Hook [A] x 1)

  • Page 272: By-Pass Feed Unit

    4. Replacement and Adjustment By-pass Feed Unit 1. Duplex unit ( p.285) 2. Disconnect the connector ( x 1).
  • Page 273 Paper Feed 3. Remove two screws ( x 2). 4. By-pass feed unit. • Lift up the left side of the unit and remove it while pulling it out forward.

  • Page 274: By-Pass Tray

    4. Replacement and Adjustment By-pass Tray 1. Open the by-pass tray [A].

  • Page 275: By-Pass Feed Paper Sensor

    Paper Feed 2. Remove two e-rings ( x 2, Stopper [A] x 1). 3. By-pass tray [A] By-pass Feed Paper Sensor 1. By-pass feed unit ( p.270)
  • Page 276 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Bracket [A] ( x 2) 3. Remove the by-pass feed paper sensor with the holder [A] ( x 1).
  • Page 277 Paper Feed 4. Sensor holder [A] (Hook x 2) 5. By-pass feed paper sensor [A] ( x 1)

  • Page 278: By-Pass Paper Size Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment By-pass Paper Size Sensor 1. By-pass feed unit ( p.270) 2. Bracket [A] ( x 2)

  • Page 279: By-Pass Feed Clutch

    Paper Feed 3. By-pass feed paper sensor with the holder [A] ( x 1) 4. By-pass feed paper sensor [A] (Hooks x 4) By-pass Feed Clutch 1. By-pass feed unit ( p.270)
  • Page 280 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Bracket [A] ( x 2) 3. Disconnect the connecter of the clutch ( x 1).

  • Page 281: By-Pass Feed Bottom Plate Hp Sensor

    Paper Feed 4. By-pass feed clutch [A] ( x 1) By-pass Feed Bottom Plate HP Sensor 1. By-pass feed unit ( p.270)
  • Page 282 4. Replacement and Adjustment 1. Sensor holder [A] ( x 2, x 1) 1. Remove the gear [A]. 2. By-pass feed bottom plate HP sensor [B] (Hooks x 4)

  • Page 283: Paper Exit

    Paper Exit Paper Exit Paper Exit Unit 1. Inner cover ( p.181) 2. Remove the right and left screws of the paper exit unit [A] ( x 3).
  • Page 284 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Paper exit unit [A] ( x 6, x 2)

  • Page 285: Paper Exit Sensor

    Paper Exit • Make sure that you do not release the exit roller drive belt [A] ([B] in step 2) by mistake when removing the paper exit unit. If the belt is released and dropped down to the lower part of the machine, you will have difficulty in reattaching it.
  • Page 286 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Paper exit sensor [A] ( x 1, hook x 4)

  • Page 287: Duplex

    Duplex Duplex Duplex Unit 1. Open the duplex unit.
  • Page 288 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Push the lever and reduce the tension of the belt [A], then remove the belt. 3. Remove two screws on the paper transport unit [A] ( x 2).
  • Page 289 Duplex 4. Lift the paper transport unit [A]. 5. Lift the duplex unit, then remove the spring [A].
  • Page 290 4. Replacement and Adjustment 6. Release the tension wire [A] from the roller [B]. 7. Restore the paper transport unit [A].
  • Page 291 Duplex 8. Connector cover [A] 9. Disconnect two connectors ( x 2, x 1).

  • Page 292: Duplex Entrance Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 10. Belt [B] ( x 1) 11. Duplex unit [A] ( x 4). Duplex Entrance Sensor 1. Open the duplex unit.
  • Page 293 Duplex 2. Sensor cover [A] (Hooks x 3) 3. Duplex entrance sensor [A] ( x 1, hook x 2)

  • Page 294: Duplex Exit Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Duplex Exit Sensor 1. Open the duplex unit. 2. Paper transfer roller ( p.224)
  • Page 295 Duplex 3. Cover [A] (Hook x 1) 4. Bracket [A] ( x 1) 5. Registration roller unit [A] 6. Bracket [B]...
  • Page 296 4. Replacement and Adjustment 7. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1) 8. Duplex exit sensor [A] (Hook x 2)

  • Page 297: Electrical Components

    Electrical Components Electrical Components Controller Box If the optional counter interface unit is installed, remove it before you remove the controller box. 1. Open the duplex unit. 2. Rear right cover ( p.178) 3. Rear cover ( p.177) 4. Left cover ( p.175) 5.
  • Page 298 4. Replacement and Adjustment 7. Remove one screw of the bracket [A] ( x 1). 8. Grounding cable [B] ( x 1) 9. Release the harness from one clamp.
  • Page 299 Electrical Components 10. Disconnect all connectors on the BICU ( x 4, all 11. Remove eight screws at the front of the controller box ( x 8).

  • Page 300: Controller Board

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 12. Controller box [A] ( x 4) Controller Board 1. Rear cover ( p.177) 2. Left cover ( p.175)
  • Page 301 Electrical Components 3. Bracket [A] ( x 6) 4. Pull out the controller board [A] ( x 4, x 1).

  • Page 302: Controller Board Dimm

    4. Replacement and Adjustment • The NVRAM [B] on the old controller board should be transferred to the new controller board. Insert the NVRAM with the notch on the NVRAM pointing upward. Controller Board DIMM 1. Rear cover ( p.177) 2.

  • Page 303: Psu

    Electrical Components 2. BICU [A] ( x 7, all • The EPPROM [B] on the old BICU board should be transferred to the new BICU board. Insert the NVRAM with the notch on the EPPROM pointing downward. 1. Controller box ( p.295)
  • Page 304 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. PSU fan ( p.308) 3. Remove the bracket ( x 3, x 3, hook x 1).

  • Page 305: Toner Bottle Id Contact Sensor

    Electrical Components 4. Disconnect seven connectors from the PSU ( x 7). 5. Remove three screws ( x 3). 6. Release the harnesses from the clamp ( x 1). 7. PSU [A] Toner Bottle ID Contact Sensor 1. HVPS (C, B) ( p.306)

  • Page 306: Acvb

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Toner bottle ID contact sensor [A] ( x 4, x 3, all ACVB 1. PSU ( p.301)
  • Page 307 Electrical Components 2. ACVB with the bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2) 3. ACVB [A] ( x 2, hook x 2)

  • Page 308: Hvps (C, B)

    4. Replacement and Adjustment HVPS (C, B) 1. Controller Box ( p.295) 2. PSU ( p.301) 3. Remove the bracket [A]. Then remove the HVPS (C, B) [B] ( x 6, hook x 3).
  • Page 309 Electrical Components 4. Disconnect the connector behind the board ( x 1). 5. HVPS (C, B) [A] ( x 5)

  • Page 310: Hvps (T1, T2)

    4. Replacement and Adjustment HVPS (T1, T2) 1. PSU ( p.301) 2. HVPS (T1, T2) [A] ( x 5, x 1) PSU Fan 1. Left cover ( p.175)
  • Page 311 Electrical Components 2. Remove the bracket [A] ( x 2). 3. Remove four screws of the fan cover [B] ( x 4). 4. Disconnect three connectors on the fan cover ( x 3).
  • Page 312 4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Remove the fan cover [A] ( x 2). 6. PSU fan [A] ( x 2)

  • Page 313: Pcdu Duct Fan

    Electrical Components PCDU Duct Fan 1. Left cover ( p.175) 2. Duct [A] ( x 2, x 1)
  • Page 314 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. PCDU duct fan ( x 2) PCDU duct fan [A]...

  • Page 315: Exhaust Fan

    Electrical Components Exhaust Fan 1. Open the duplex unit. 2. Rear right cover ( p.178)

  • Page 316: Temperature / Humidity Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Exhaust fan [A] ( x 2, x 1) • Install the exhaust fan with its engraved mark facing the outside of the machine. • Make sure that the engraved mark on the exhaust fan faces the outside of the machine when replacing it.

  • Page 317: Ardf

    ARDF ARDF ARDF Unit 1. Remove the scanner rear cover [A] ( x 2). 2. Remove the stud screw [A]. 3. Remove the ground cable [B] ( x 1). 4. Remove the clamp [C].

  • Page 318: When Installing The Ardf

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Disconnect the I/F cable [D]. 6. Remove the ARDF [A] from the copier as shown. When installing the ARDF 1. Open the ARDF. 2. Place the platen sheet [A] on the exposure glass. 3. Line up the rear left corner of the platen sheet flush against corner [B] on the exposure glass.

  • Page 319: Ardf Rear Cover

    ARDF 4. Close the ARDF. 5. Reopen the ARDF. 6. Press the surface of the platen sheet gently to fix it on the ARDF firmly. ARDF Rear Cover 1. Open the ARDF left cover [A]. 2. ARDF rear cover [B] ( x 1) Original Feed Unit 1.

  • Page 320: Pick-Up Roller

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Original feed unit [A] Pick-up Roller 1. Original feed unit ( p.317) 2. Release the hook [A]. 3. Slide the shaft [A], and then remove the pick-up roller [B]. Feed Roller 1. Original feed unit ( p.317)
  • Page 321 ARDF 2. Remove the clip [A]. 3. Slide the shaft [A], and then remove the pin [B].

  • Page 322: Friction Pad

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Slide the shaft [A], and then remove the feed roller [B]. Friction Pad 1. Original feed unit ( p.317) 2. Turn the lock lever [A] clockwise. 3. Friction pad [A] (hook x 3)

  • Page 323: Dfrb

    ARDF DFRB 1. ARDF rear cover ( p.317) 2. DFRB [A] ( x 4, hook x 1) ARDF Top Cover Sensor/ Original Set Sensor 1. ARDF rear cover ( p.317) 2. ARDF top cover sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks) 3.
  • Page 324 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Guide plate [A] (hook x 2) 3. Guide plate [A] ( x 5) 4. Release the clamps and disconnect the connectors ( x 3, x 2).
  • Page 325 ARDF 5. Holder [A] ( x 1) 6. Hinge [A] ( x 3) 7. Bracket [A] ( x 2)

  • Page 326: White Plate

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 8. ARDF drive motor [A] ( x 2, x 1) • Do not touch the encoder [B] when holding the motor. White Plate 1. Open the ARDF. 2. White plate [A] (hook x 2)

  • Page 327: When Installing The White Plate

    ARDF When installing the white plate Make sure that the mylars [A] are outside the white plate. Registration Sensor 1. White plate ( p.324) 2. Registration sensor holder [A] ( x 1)
  • Page 328 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Registration sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks)

  • Page 329: System Maintenance

    5. System Maintenance Service Program Mode • Make sure that the data-in LED ( ) is not on before you go into the SP mode. This LED indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for the copier to process the data.

  • Page 330: Sp Mode Button Summary

    5. System Maintenance • Fax SP: SP modes related to the fax functions Select one of the Service Program modes (System, Printer, Scanner, or Fax) from the touch panel as shown in the diagram below after you access the SP mode. This section explains the functions of the System/Printer/Scanner SP modes.

  • Page 331: Exiting Service Mode

    Service Program Mode 1. Refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to adjust before you begin. 2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP that you want to adjust.

  • Page 332: Remarks

    5. System Maintenance 3. After machine servicing is completed: • Change SP5169 from "1" to "0". • Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you have completed servicing the machine. • The Administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON. Remarks Display on the Control Panel Screen The maximum number of characters which can show on the control panel screen is limited to 30...

  • Page 333: Others

    Service Program Mode Others The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables. FA: Factory setting (Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to the factory setting sheets enclosed. You can find it under the jammed paper removal decal.) DFU: Design/Factory Use only Do not touch these SP modes in the field.

  • Page 334: Main Sp Tables-1

    5. System Maintenance Main SP Tables-1 SP1-XXX (Feed) [Leading Edge Registration] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment (Tray Location, Paper Type, Color Mode), Paper Type: Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2 or Thick3 1001 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration motor operation timing for each mode.
  • Page 335 Main SP Tables-1 023 By-pass: Special 1: 1200 *ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 1.1 / 0.1mm/step] 024 Duplex: Special 1: 1200 *ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 1.1 / 0.1mm/step] [Side-to-Side Registration] Side-to-Side Registration Adjustment 1002 Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start position for each mode and tray.
  • Page 336 5. System Maintenance 013 Paper Tray1: Plain:1200 *ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 / 1mm/step] Paper Tray1: Middle Thick: *ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 / 1mm/step] 1200 015 Paper Tray2/3: Plain:1200 *ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 / 1mm/step] Paper Tray2/3: Middle Thick: *ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 / 1mm/step]...
  • Page 337 Main SP Tables-1 016 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 50 / 1deg/step] 018 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 45 / 1deg/step] 019 Rotation Time:BW:Cold *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1sec/step] 020 Temp.:Delta:Warm:BW:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 60 / 1deg/step] 022 Temp.:Delta:Warm:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 45 / 1deg/step]...
  • Page 338 5. System Maintenance 009 Temp.:Upper Delta:Center:Sp.1 *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1deg/step] 011 Temp.:Lower Delta:Press:Sp.1 *ENG [0 to 200 / 95 / 1deg/step] 012 Rotation Time:Sp.1 *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1sec/step] 013 Temp.:Lower Delta:Center:Sp.2 *ENG [0 to 200 / 40 / 1deg/step] 015 Temp.:Upper Delta:Center:Sp.2 *ENG...
  • Page 339 Main SP Tables-1 009 Thin:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 150 / 1deg/step] 010 Thin:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 150 / 1deg/step] 011 Thin:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 140 / 1deg/step] 012 Thin:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 150 / 1deg/step] 013 M-thick:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 165 / 1deg/step]...
  • Page 340 5. System Maintenance 035 Special2:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 160 / 1deg/step] 036 Special2:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 150 / 1deg/step] 037 Special3:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 160 / 1deg/step] 038 Special3:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 150 / 1deg/step] 039 Special3:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 150 / 1deg/step]...
  • Page 341 Main SP Tables-1 117 Special1:FC:Center:Low Speed *ENG [100 to 180 / 140 / 1deg/step 118 Special1:FC:Press:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 200 / 150 / 1deg/step] 119 Special1:BW:Center:Low Speed *ENG [100 to 180 / 130 / 1deg/step] 120 Special1:BW:Press:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 200 / 150 / 1deg/step] 121 Special2:FC:Center:Low Speed *ENG...
  • Page 342 5. System Maintenance Print Ready:Center *ENG [0 to 180 / 150 / 1deg/step] Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the print ready condition. 1108 [After Reload/Job Target Temp.] DFU Center *ENG [0 to 180 / 150 / 1deg/step] Specifies the temperature of the heating roller after re-load or job.
  • Page 343 Main SP Tables-1 Humidity:Threshold:M-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 1 / 1 %/step] Specifies the threshold between low and middle humidity. Humidity:Threshold:H-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step] Specifies the threshold between middle and high humidity. Permit Temp.:Delta:Press:M- *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1deg/step] humid...
  • Page 344 5. System Maintenance [CPM Down Setting] DFU 1124 Specifies the settings for the CPM down mode. Low:Down Temp. *ENG [-50 to 0 / -20 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the CPM down threshold temperature for the low temperature condition. If the fusing temperature decreases -20°C (adjustable) below the target temperature, the machine enters the CPM down mode.
  • Page 345 Main SP Tables-1 [Fusing SC Issue Time Info] 1141 Displays the time when an SC code was issued. 001 SC Number *ENG Displays the issued SC number. 101 Htg Roller:Ctr Diff1 *ENG [-50 to 260 / - / 1deg/step] 104 Htg Roller:End Diff1 *ENG [-50 to 260 / - / 1deg/step] 107 Press Roller Temp Value1...
  • Page 346 5. System Maintenance Pre-idling Time *ENG [0 to 999 / 300 / 1sec/step] Specifies the fusing rotation time before executing SP1152-001. Stop Time *ENG [0 to 100 / 20 / 1sec/step] Specifies the time for measuring the nip. Feed Time *ENG [0 to 10000 / 8316 / 1msec/step] 1153...
  • Page 347 Main SP Tables-1 003 transportM:M-Thick *ENG [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.00 / 0.01%/step] 004 transportM:Thick1 *ENG [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.00 / 0.01%/step] 005 transportM:Thick2 *ENG [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.00 / 0.01%/step] 006 transportM:Thick3 *ENG [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.00 / 0.01%/step] 007 transportM:Special1 *ENG [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.00 / 0.01%/step]...
  • Page 348 5. System Maintenance [-10.00 to 10.00 / 1.50 / 0.01%/ 031 FusingMot:Thick3 *ENG step] [-10.00 to 10.00 / 0.90 / 0.01%/ 032 FusingMot:Special1 *ENG step] [-10.00 to 10.00 / 0.90 / 0.01%/ 033 FusingMot:Special2 *ENG step] [-10.00 to 10.00 / 0.90 / 0.01%/ 034 FusingMot:Special3 *ENG step]...
  • Page 349 Main SP Tables-1 130 OpcMotAdjCtrl *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] [Paper Feed Timing Adj.] 1907 Adjusts the timing of paper feed. (A "+" setting broadens paper feed interval, a “-” setting narrows paper feed interval.) 001 Tray1 Clutch ON: Plain *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1mm/step] 002 Tray1 Clutch ON: Middle Thick...
  • Page 350 5. System Maintenance ExitPaperDivergence *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1mm/step] SOL:OFF:Low ExitPaperDivergence *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1mm/step] SOL:ON:Low 027 Reversing change SOL:OFF:Low *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1mm/step] 028 Reversing change SOL:ON:Low *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1mm/step] 029 Tray1Motor Pressure *ENG...
  • Page 351 Main SP Tables-1 Tray3 Bank 1st Page Edge *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1mm/step] Position: Middle Thick Tray3 Bank 1st Page Edge *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1mm/step] Position: Thick Tray2 Bank Mimimum Page *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1mm/step] Interval: Plain Tray2 Bank Mimimum Page *ENG...
  • Page 352 5. System Maintenance [Fan Control Off Mode Time Set] 1952 Specifies the time for fan control off mode. 001 - *ENG [0 to 60 / 10 / 1min/step] [Extra Fan Control] 1953 Configures the settings of extra fan control. [0 or 1 / - / 1/step] Extra Fan Cooling State *ENG Off, 1: On...

  • Page 353: Main Sp Tables-2

    Main SP Tables-2 Main SP Tables-2 SP2-XXX (Drum) [Magnification Adjustment] 2102 These values are the parameters for the automatic line position adjustment and are adjusted at the factory. These SPs must be input only when a new laser unit is installed. 001 Main Mag.: High Speed: Bk *ENG 004 Main Mag.: High Speed: Ma...
  • Page 354 5. System Maintenance [Unit LD Power Adj.] 2104 Adjusts the LD initial power. These SPs must be input only when a new laser unit is installed. 001 Bk *ENG 002 Ma *ENG [60.0 to 140.0 / 100.0 / 0.1%/step] 003 Cy *ENG 004 Ye *ENG...
  • Page 355 Main SP Tables-2 002 Shading Correction Flag *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 2109 [Pattern Selection] Pattern Selection *ENG [0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step] Selects the test pattern. 11. Independent Pattern (1dot) 0 None 12. Independent Pattern (2dot) 1: Vertical Line (1dot) 13.
  • Page 356 5. System Maintenance [Execute] Executes the fine line position adjustment once. 002 Mode b If this SP is not completed, do SP2111-003 first and then try this SP again [Execute] Executes the rough line position adjustment once. 003 Mode c After doing this SP, make sure to execute SP2111-001 or -002.
  • Page 357 Main SP Tables-2 [TM/ID Sensor Check Result] Displays the maximum result values of the ID sensor check. 2140 Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process control 001 PWM: ID Sensor *ENG 005 PWM: Front *ENG [0 to 1024 / - / 1/step] 006 PWM: Center...
  • Page 358 5. System Maintenance [TM/ID Sensor Check Result] Displays the minimum result values of the ID sensor check. 2143 Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process control 001 Minimum: ID Sensor *ENG 005 Minimum: Front *ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / - / 0.01V/step] 006 Minimum: Center...
  • Page 359 Main SP Tables-2 005 Number of Edge Detection:Front *ENG Number of Edge *ENG [0 to 16 / - / 1/step] Detection:Center 007 Number of Edge Detection:Rear *ENG [Area Mag. Correction] LD Pulse Area Correction (Color, Area) FA Adjusts the magnification for each area. The main scan (297 mm) is divided into 13 areas. Area 1 is at the front side of the machine (left side of the image) and area 13 is at the rear side of the machine (right side of the image).
  • Page 360 5. System Maintenance 086 Area 7: Ma *ENG [-16.00 to 16.00 / 0.00 / 0.01dot/step] 087 Area 8: Ma *ENG [-16.00 to 16.00 / 0.00 / 0.01dot/step] 131 Area 0: Cy *ENG [-16.00 to 16.00 / 0.00 / 0.01dot/step] 132 Area 1: Cy *ENG [-16.00 to 16.00 / 0.00 / 0.01dot/step] 133 Area 2: Cy...
  • Page 361 Main SP Tables-2 003 Area 2: Bk *ENG [-31 to 31 / 0 / 1/step] 004 Area 3: Bk *ENG [-31 to 31 / 0 / 1/step] 005 Area 4: Bk *ENG [-31 to 31 / 0 / 1/step] 006 Area 5: Bk *ENG [-31 to 31 / 0 / 1/step] 007 Area 6: Bk...
  • Page 362 5. System Maintenance 069 Area 4: Cy *ENG [-31 to 31 / 0 / 1/step] 070 Area 5: Cy *ENG [-31 to 31 / 0 / 1/step] 071 Area 6: Cy *ENG [-31 to 31 / 0 / 1/step] 072 Area 7: Cy *ENG [-31 to 31 / 0 / 1/step] 073 Area 8: Cy...
  • Page 363 Main SP Tables-2 001 Color Regist. 002 Main Scan Length Detection 003 MUSIC Result 004 Area Magnification Correction [Execute] Area Magnification Correction:unit2 006 Shading Correction:unit1 007 Shading Correction:unit2 [Line Position Adj. Result] Displays the values for each correction. "M. Cor.: Dot" indicates the dot correction value in the main scan direction. 2181 "M.
  • Page 364 5. System Maintenance 030 M. Cor.: Subdot: C *ENG [-1.00 to 1.00 / - / 0.01dot/step] 033 C. Left Mag.: Subdot: M *ENG [-32.00 to 32.00 / - / 0.01dot/step] 034 C. Right Mag.: Subdot: M *ENG [-32.00 to 32.00 / - / 0.01dot/step] 035 S.
  • Page 365 Main SP Tables-2 008 M. Scan: Low: Dot: M *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1dot/step] 009 M. Scan: Low: Subdot: M *ENG [-1.00 to 1.00 / 0.00 / 0.01dot/step] 010 M. Scan: High: Dot: C *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1dot/step] 011 M.
  • Page 366 5. System Maintenance Page: Job End: BW+FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 500 / 1page/step] Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW and color printing mode after job end. Page: Job End: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1page/step] Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for color printing mode after job end.
  • Page 367 Main SP Tables-2 Temp. 2 *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1deg/step] Adjust the temperature change threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode a: adjustment twice). The timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of several conditions. Time 2 *ENG [1 to 9999 / 600 / 1minute/step]...
  • Page 368 5. System Maintenance [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 007 Execution Result *ENG 0: Completed successfully, 1: Failed 008 Number of Execution *ENG [0 to 999999 / - / 1 times/step] 009 Number of Failure *ENG [0 to 999999 / - / 1 times/step] 010 Error Result: C *ENG [0 to 9 / - / 1/step]...
  • Page 369 Main SP Tables-2 Sets the environment condition manually. [0 to 6 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Automatic environment control 1: LL (Low temperature/ Low humidity) 2: ML (Middle temperature/ Low humidity) 002 Forced Setting *ENG 3: MM (Middle temperature/ Middle humidity) 4: MH (Middle temperature/ High humidity)
  • Page 370 5. System Maintenance [0 to 250 / 165 / 1mm/step] 002 Threshold 2 *ENG Threshold 2 ≤ paper ≤ Threshold 1: Paper is detected as "S2" size. [0 to 250 / 139 / 1mm/step] 003 Threshold 3 *ENG Threshold 3 ≤ paper ≤ Threshold 2: Paper is detected as "S3"...
  • Page 371 Main SP Tables-2 2327 [Transfer Roller CL:Bias] 001 Recovery *ENG [0 to 20 / 10 / 1times/step] 002 Process Control *ENG [0 to 20 / 5 / 1times/step] [Common:BW:Bias] 2351 Image Transfer Belt: B/W: Bias Adjustment Image Transfer:standard *ENG [0 to 60 / 23 / 1 A] Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for plain paper.
  • Page 372 5. System Maintenance 001 Separation DC:standard:1side *ENG 002 Separation DC:standard:2side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 0 / 10-V/step] 003 Separation DC:low:1side *ENG 004 Separation DC:low:2side *ENG [Plain1:Bias:BW] 2403 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain 1 paper in black-and-white mode. 001 PaperTransfer:standard:1side *ENG [0 to 200 / 25 / 1-uA/step]...
  • Page 373 Main SP Tables-2 006 PaperTransfer:Standard:2Sid:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 156 / 5%/step] 007 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 139 / 5%/step] 008 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 194 / 5%/step] 009 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 140 / 5%/step] 010 PaperTransfer:Standard:2Sid:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 240 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 374 5. System Maintenance 012 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 274 / 5%/step] 013 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 147 / 5%/step] 014 PaperTransfer:Standard:2Sid:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 243 / 5%/step] 015 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 205 / 5%/step] 016 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 283 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 375 Main SP Tables-2 002 PaperTransfer:standard:2side *ENG [0 to 200 / 35 / 1-uA/step] 003 PaperTransfer:low:1side *ENG [0 to 200 / 22 / 1-uA/step] 004 PaperTransfer:low:2side *ENG [0 to 200 / 23 / 1-uA/step] [Plain2:SizeCorrection:BW] 2431 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size.
  • Page 376 5. System Maintenance 001 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 002 PaperTransfer:Standard:2Sid:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 003 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 004 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 005 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 132 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 377 Main SP Tables-2 001 PaperTransfer:standard:1side *ENG [0 to 200 / 22 / 1-uA/step] 002 PaperTransfer:standard:2side *ENG [0 to 200 / 25 / 1-uA/step] 003 PaperTransfer:low:1side *ENG [0 to 200 / 17 / 1-uA/step] 004 PaperTransfer:low:2side *ENG [0 to 200 / 17 / 1-uA/step] [Middle:Bias:FC] 2447 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for middle thick paper in full color mode.
  • Page 378 5. System Maintenance 013 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 164 / 5%/step] 014 PaperTransfer:Standard:2Sid:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 240 / 5%/step] 015 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 132 / 5%/step] 016 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 257 / 5%/step] [Middle:SizeCorrection:FC] 2452 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper...
  • Page 379 Main SP Tables-2 001 Separation DC:standard:1side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 2000 / 10-V/step] 003 Separation DC:low:1side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 2000 / 10-V/step] [Thin:Bias:BW] 2463 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in black-and-white mode. 001 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid *ENG [0 to 200 / 13 / 1-uA/step]...
  • Page 380 5. System Maintenance 001 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 003 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S1 *ENG 005 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S2 *ENG 007 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 135 / 5%/step] 009 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S3 *ENG 011 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S3 *ENG 013 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 220 / 5%/step] 015 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S4 *ENG [Thick1:Bias]...
  • Page 381 Main SP Tables-2 003 PaperTransfer:1Side:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 004 PaperTransfer:2Side:S1 *ENG 007 PaperTransfer:1Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 167 / 5%/step] 008 PaperTransfer:2Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 194 / 5%/step] 011 PaperTransfer:1Side:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 233 / 5%/step] 012 PaperTransfer:2Side:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 250 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 382 5. System Maintenance [Thick2:Bias:BW 2503 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 2 paper in black-and-white mode. Middle: 182 mm/sec, Low: 85 mm/sec 003 PaperTransfer:1side *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1-uA/step] 004 PaperTransfer:2side *ENG [0 to 200 / 18 / 1-uA/step] [Thick2:Bias:FC] 2507 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 2 paper in full color mode.
  • Page 383 Main SP Tables-2 003 PaperTransfer:1Side:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 004 PaperTransfer:2Side:S1 *ENG 007 PaperTransfer:1Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 158 / 5%/step] 008 PaperTransfer:2Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 180 / 5%/step] 011 PaperTransfer:1Side:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 211 / 5%/step] 012 PaperTransfer:2Side:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 260 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 384 5. System Maintenance 003 Paper Transfer:1side *ENG 004 Paper Transfer:2side *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 007 Separation DC:1side *ENG 008 Separation DC:2side *ENG [Thick2:SwitchTimingTrailEdge] 2518 Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode.
  • Page 385 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick3:LeadingEdgeCorrection] 2535 Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode. 003 Paper Transfer:1side *ENG 004 Paper Transfer:2side *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 007 Separation DC:1side *ENG 008 Separation DC:2side *ENG...
  • Page 386 5. System Maintenance 003 Paper Transfer:1side *ENG 004 Paper Transfer:2side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm/step] 007 Separation DC:1side *ENG 008 Separation DC:2side *ENG [Thick3:EnvCorrectionTable] 2539 Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode. When the environment is detected as MM, SP2651 and SP2652 are multiplied by these SP values.
  • Page 387 Main SP Tables-2 015 PaperTransfer:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 /200 / 5%/step] [OHP:SizeCorrection:FC] 2552 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. 003 PaperTransfer:S1 *ENG [100 or 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 007 PaperTransfer:S2 *ENG [100 or 995 / 150 / 5%/step] 011 PaperTransfer:S3...
  • Page 388 5. System Maintenance [OHP:LeadingEdgeCorrection] 2558 Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode. 003 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm/step] 007 Separation DC *ENG 2559 [OHP:EnvCorrectionTable] 015 Separation DC *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1/step] [Special1:Bias]...
  • Page 389 Main SP Tables-2 003 PaperTransfer:low:1side *ENG [0 to 200 / 11 / 1-uA/step] 004 PaperTransfer:low:2side *ENG [0 to 200 / 12 / 1-uA/step] [Special1:SizeCorrection:BW] 2571 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. 001 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S1 *ENG 002 PaperTransfer:Standard:2Sid:S1...
  • Page 390 5. System Maintenance 001 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S1 *ENG 002 PaperTransfer:Standard:2Sid:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 003 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S1 *ENG 004 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S1 *ENG 005 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 135 / 5%/step] 006 PaperTransfer:Standard:2Sid:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 200 / 5%/step] 007 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 135 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 391 Main SP Tables-2 001 PaperTransfer:standard:1side *ENG [0 to 200 / 12 / 1-uA/step] 002 PaperTransfer:standard:2side *ENG [0 to 200 / 10 / 1-uA/step] 003 PaperTransfer:low:1side *ENG [0 to 200 / 9 / 1-uA/step] 004 PaperTransfer:low:2side *ENG [0 to 200 / 11 / 1-uA/step] [Special2:Bias:FC] 2587 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 2 in full color mode.
  • Page 392 5. System Maintenance 013 PaperTransfer:standard:1Sid:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 200 / 5%/step] 014 PaperTransfer:standard:2Sid:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 435 / 5%/step] 015 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 200 / 5%/step] 016 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 435 / 5%/step] [Special2:SizeCorrection:FC] 2592 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper...
  • Page 393 Main SP Tables-2 001 Separation DC:standard:1side *ENG 002 Separation DC:standard:2side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 2000 / 10-V/step] 003 Separation DC:low:1side *ENG 004 Separation DC:low:2side *ENG [Special3:Bias:BW] 2603 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 3 in black-and-white mode.
  • Page 394 5. System Maintenance 006 PaperTransfer:standard:2Sid:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 160 / 5%/step] 007 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step] 008 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 160 / 5%/step] 009 PaperTransfer:standard:1Sid:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step] 010 PaperTransfer:standard:2Sid:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 270 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 395 Main SP Tables-2 012 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 270 / 5%/step] 013 PaperTransfer:standard:1Sid:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 200 / 5%/step] 014 PaperTransfer:standard:2Sid:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 435 / 5%/step] 015 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 200 / 5%/step] 016 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 435 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 396 5. System Maintenance 011 PaperTransfer:1Side:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step] 012 PaperTransfer:2Side:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 270 / 5%/step] 015 PaperTransfer:1Side:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 200 / 5%/step] 016 PaperTransfer:2Side:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 435 / 5%/step] [Thick2:SizeCorrection:FC] 2632 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper...
  • Page 397 Main SP Tables-2 016 PaperTransfer:2Side:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 22 / 1/step] [Thick2:Size-Env.Correct:FC] 2634 Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. 003 PaperTransfer:1Side:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 13 / 1/step] 004 PaperTransfer:2Side:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 38 / 1/step]...
  • Page 398 5. System Maintenance [Thick2:SizeCorrection:BW] 2651 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. 003 PaperTransfer:1Side:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 004 PaperTransfer:2Side:S1 *ENG 007 PaperTransfer:1Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step] 008 PaperTransfer:2Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 160 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 399 Main SP Tables-2 003 Separation DC:1side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 2000 / 10-V/step] 004 Separation DC:2side *ENG [Thick2:Bias:BW 2663 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 2 paper in black-and-white mode. 003 PaperTransfer:1side *ENG [0 to 200 / 8 / 1-uA/step] 004 PaperTransfer:2side *ENG [0 to 200 / 11 / 1-uA/step]...
  • Page 400 5. System Maintenance 003 PaperTransfer:1Side:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 004 PaperTransfer:2Side:S1 *ENG 007 PaperTransfer:1Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step] 008 PaperTransfer:2Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 160 / 5%/step] 011 PaperTransfer:1Side:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step] 012 PaperTransfer:2Side:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 270 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 401 Main SP Tables-2 Counter K [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1mm/step] Rotation counter (Bk) to determine if development roller reverse is required or not. Counter Cl [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1mm/step] Rotation counter (Color) to determine if development roller reverse is required or not. [Transfer:Bias Limiter] 2930 Adjusts the threshold between high resistance (division 1) and low resistance (division 2)
  • Page 402 5. System Maintenance Duty Control State *ENG [0 to 1 / - / 1/step] Displays the Duty limitation status of the current printing. 0: Not limited 1: Limited Exec Interval: Duty Control *ENG [30 to 3600 / 30 / 10sec/step] Sets the determination time interval to determine if the printing Duty limitation is executed or not.

  • Page 403: Main Sp Tables-3

    Main SP Tables-3 Main SP Tables-3 SP3-XXX (Process) 3011 [Manual ProCon:Exe] Executes the normal process control manually (potential control). 001 Normal ProCon Check the result with SP3-325-001 and 3-012-001 after executing this SP. [Execute] Executes the toner density adjustment. 002 Density Adjustment [Execute] Executes the process control that is normally done before ACC.
  • Page 404 5. System Maintenance 001 History:Last *ENG 002 History:Last 2 *ENG 003 History:Last 3 *ENG 004 History:Last 4 *ENG Displays the result of the latest process control 005 History:Last 5 *ENG execution. 006 History:Last 6 *ENG [1111 to 99999999 / - / 1/step] 007 History:Last 7 *ENG 008 History:Last 8...
  • Page 405 Main SP Tables-3 Sets the supply ON or OFF time of each supply in the forced toner supply processing routin. 031 ON Time *ENG [10 to 1000 / 200 / 1msec/step] Sets the supply ON or OFF time of each supply in the forced toner supply processing routin.
  • Page 406 5. System Maintenance 001 Disp Vsg reg(front) *ENG 002 Disp Vsg reg(center) *ENG 003 Disp Vsg reg(rear) *ENG [0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01V/step] 011 Disp Voffset(front) *ENG 012 Disp Voffset(center) *ENG 013 Disp Voffset(rear) *ENG 3100 [Tonner End Detection: Set] Enables/disables the toner alert display on the LCD.
  • Page 407 Main SP Tables-3 011 Pixel: Bk *ENG Displays the toner remainig amount calculated 012 Pixel: C *ENG with image processing coverage. 013 Pixel: M *ENG [0.000 to 500.000 / - / 0.001g/step] 014 Pixel: Y *ENG 021 Fill Amount: Bk *ENG 022 Fill Amount: C *ENG...
  • Page 408 5. System Maintenance 3250 [ImgArea :Disp] 001 ImgArea:K *ENG 002 ImgArea:C *ENG Diplays image area of the latest page. [0 to 9999 / - / 1cm2/step] 003 ImgArea:M *ENG 004 ImgArea:Y *ENG 3251 [DotCoverage :Disp] 001 DotCoverage:K *ENG 002 DotCoverage:C *ENG Diplays image coverage of the latest page.
  • Page 409 Main SP Tables-3 Sets the cumulative pages (M). 042 TotalPage:S:Set *ENG [1 to 500 / 10 / 1sheets/step] Sets the cumulative pages (L). 043 TotalPage:S:Set *ENG [1 to 999 / 50 / 1sheets/step] Sets the cumulative pages (S2). 051 TotalPage:S:Set *ENG [1 to 255 / 40 / 1sheets/step] Sets the cumulative pages (M2).
  • Page 410 5. System Maintenance 001 Process Control *ENG Enables or disables each adjustment at toner near end. 002 MUSIC *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 0:Permit (adjustment is done even toner near end condition) 003 TC Adj. *ENG 1:Forbid (adjustment is not done at toner near end condition) 3510 [ImgQltyAdj :ExeFlag]...
  • Page 411 Main SP Tables-3 Sets the execution flag for charge roller cleaning. 026 Charge AC Adj. *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 031 Init Toner Replenish: K *ENG Sets the execution flag for toner initial 032 Init Toner Replenish: C *ENG replenish.
  • Page 412 5. System Maintenance Displays the relative humidity at the end of the image processing. 002 Rel Humidity *ENG [0.0 to 1000.0 / - / 0.1%RH/step] Displays the absolute humidity at the end of the image processing. 003 Abs Humidity *ENG [0.0 to 1000.0 / - / 0.1gm3/step] 3529 [ProCon Interval Control :Set]...
  • Page 413 Main SP Tables-3 Sets the threshold for process control execution determination at power on. 003 Relative Humidity Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 50 / 1%RH/step] Sets the threshold for process control execution determination at power on. 004 Absolute Humidity Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 6 / 1g/m3/step] Sets the threshold for process control execution...
  • Page 414 5. System Maintenance 3533 [Interrupt ProCon :Set] Sets the page interval for interrupt process control. 001 Interval:Set:BW *ENG [0 to 5000 / 500 / 1sheets/step] Displays the page interval for interrupt process control. 002 Interval:Disp:BW *ENG [0 to 5000 / - / 1sheets/step] Sets the correction coeficient (Short) of page interval for interrupt process control.
  • Page 415 Main SP Tables-3 Displays the page interval for job end process control. 002 Interval:Disp:BW *ENG [0 to 5000 / - / 1sheets/step] Sets the correctin coeficient (Short) for job end process control. 003 Corr(Short):BW *ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.20 / 0.01/step] Sets the correctin coeficient (Mid) for job end process control.
  • Page 416 5. System Maintenance Turns new PCDU detection on or off. 001 ON/OFF Setting *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] [Manual New Unit Set] 3701 Turns the new unit detection flag for each PM unit on or off. 001 Development Unit: K *ENG Sets the flag for new development unit manual 002 Development Unit: C...
  • Page 417 Main SP Tables-3 Sets the flag for new fusing belt manual settings. 016 Fusing Belt *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: OFF, 1: ON Sets the flag for new image transfer cleaning unit manual settings. 017 Image Transfer Cleaning Unit *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: OFF, 1: ON...
  • Page 418 5. System Maintenance 027 Toner Sub-hopper: K *ENG Sets the flag for new toner sub hopper manual 028 Toner Sub-hopper: C *ENG settings. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 029 Toner Sub-hopper: M *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON 030 Toner Sub-hopper: Y *ENG 3710 [HST Concentration Control: Set]...
  • Page 419 Main SP Tables-3 Displays adjustment value stored in HST memory. 013 Adjustment: Vtcnt *ENG [0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step] Displays adjustment value stored in HST memory. 014 Adjustment: Gamma *ENG [0.0 to 2.55 / - / 0.01mg/cm2/-kV/step] Displays adjustment value stored in HST memory.
  • Page 420 5. System Maintenance Displays adjustment value stored in HST memory. 014 Adjustment: Gamma *ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / - / 0.01mg/cm2/-kV/step] Displays adjustment value stored in HST memory. 015 Adjustment: Vcnt Result *ENG [0 to 9 / - / 1/step] [HST Concentration Control: M] 3713 Displays release check value stored in HST memory.
  • Page 421 Main SP Tables-3 Displays adjustment value stored in HST memory. 014 Adjustment: Gamma *ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / - / 0.01mg/cm2/-kV/step] Displays adjustment value stored in HST memory. 015 Adjustment: Vcnt Result *ENG [0 to 9 / - / 1/step] 3714 [HST Concentration Control: Y] 001 Vcnt...
  • Page 422 5. System Maintenance Displays adjustment value stored in HST memory. 015 Adjustment: Vcnt Result *ENG [0 to 9 / - / 1/step] 3750 [ProCon SC :Last] Displays SC number of occured process control 001 SC Number *ENG [0 to 999 / - / 1/step] Displays the time of occurance (year, month, day, time) of occured process control SC.
  • Page 423 Main SP Tables-3 Displays the SC number of the occured SC for process control at onset. 001 SC Number *ENG [0 to 999 / - / 1/step] Displays the date (year, month, day) and time of the occured SC for process control at onset. 002 DateTime *ENG [0 to 4212312459 / - / 1/step]...
  • Page 424 5. System Maintenance Displays the date (year, month, day) and time of the occured SC for process control at onset. 002 DateTime *ENG [0 to 4212312459 / - / 1/step] Displays the total pages of the occured SC for process control at onset. 003 TotalCounter *ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1pages/step]...
  • Page 425 Main SP Tables-3 Displays the total pages of the occured SC for process control at onset. 003 TotalCounter *ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1pages/step] Displays the result code (detailed history) of occured SC for process control. 004 ProCon Result Code *ENG [0 to 99999999 / - / 1/step] 3757...
  • Page 426 5. System Maintenance Displays the result code (detailed history) of occured SC for process control. 004 ProCon Result Code *ENG [0 to 99999999 / - / 1/step] 3759 [ProCon SC :Last9] Displays the SC number of the occured SC for process control at onset.

  • Page 427: Main Sp Tables-4

    Main SP Tables-4 Main SP Tables-4 SP4-XXX (Scanner) [Sub Scan Mag.Adjustment] 4008 Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed. 001 - *ENG [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0.0 / 0.1%/step] [L-Edge Regist Adjustment] 4010 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the sub-scan direction.
  • Page 428 5. System Maintenance 002 Lamp ON [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0:OFF, 1:ON [Scan] 4014 Execute the scanner free fun with each mode. 001 HP Detection Enable [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0:OFF, 1:ON 002 HP Detection Disable [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0:OFF, 1:ON 4020 [Dust Check]...
  • Page 429 Main SP Tables-4 004 Book: Right *ENG [0.0 to 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] [IPU Test Pattern] 4417 Selects the IPU test pattern. 001 Test Pattern [0 to 24 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Scanned image 13: Grid pattern CMYK 1: Gradation main scan A 14: Color patch CMYK 2: Gradation main scan B...
  • Page 430 5. System Maintenance [ACC Target Density] 4501 Selects the ACC result. 001 Copy: K: Text *ENG 002 Copy: C: Text *ENG 003 Copy: M: Text *ENG 004 Copy: Y: Text *ENG [0 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step] 10: Darkest density 005 Copy: K: Photo *ENG 006 Copy: C: Photo...
  • Page 431 Main SP Tables-4 001 Text:K *ENG 002 Text:C *ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step] 003 Text:M *ENG 004 Text:Y *ENG 005 Photo:K *ENG 006 Photo:C *ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step] 007 Photo:M *ENG 008 Photo:Y *ENG [AGC Execution]...
  • Page 432 5. System Maintenance 001 Book Scan *ENG [-512 to 511 / -85 / 1digit/step] 002 DF Scan *ENG [Scan Adjust Error] 4645 Displays the error value of the scanning adjustment. 001 White level [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step] 002 Black level [Scanner Hard Error] 4647...
  • Page 433 Main SP Tables-4 4808 [Factory Setting Input] 002 Execution Flag *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] [Disp ACC Data] This SP outputs the final data read at the end of ACC execution. 4902 A zero is returned if there was an error reading the data. [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step] 001 R_DATA1 *ENG...
  • Page 434 5. System Maintenance [Total Regulation:Photo Copy] 4931 Sets the total regulation value. 001 FC 1 *ENG [0 to 400 / 240 / 1 /step] 002 FC 2 *ENG [0 to 400 / 260 / 1 /step] 003 Mono *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 1 /step] 004 Color Process *ENG [0 to 400 / 200 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 435 Main SP Tables-4 Selects the Highlight correction level. [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step] 001 Sensitivity Selection *ENG 0: weakest sensitivity 9: strongest sensitivity Selects the range level of Highlight correction. [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step] 002 Range Selection *ENG 0: weakest skew correction,...

  • Page 436: Main Sp Tables-5

    5. System Maintenance Main SP Tables-5 SP5-XXX (Mode) [mm/inch Display Selection] Switches the unit between mm and inch displayed on the LCD. 5024 • Turn off and of the main power after changing this setting. 0: mm (Europe/Asia) 001 0:mm 1:inch *CTL 1: inch (USA) [Accounting Counter]...
  • Page 437 Main SP Tables-5 [Part Replacement Alert Display] 5062 Display or does not display the PM part yield on the LCD. 001 PCDU: K *CTL 002 PCDU: C *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: No display, 1: Display 003 PCDU: M *CTL 004 PCDU: Y...
  • Page 438 5. System Maintenance [Set Bypass Paper Size Display] 5071 Enables or disables the bypass paper size display for confirmation [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *CTL 0: Disable, 1: Enable Turn on or off the paper size confirmation pop-up on the LED. This pop-up prevents mismatching between a paper size selected by the operation panel and an actual paper size on the by-pass tray.
  • Page 439 Main SP Tables-5 5101 [Energy Save] 005 Level [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 5113 [Optional Counter Type] This program specifies the counter type. 0: None, 1: Key card (RK 3, 4) 2: Key card (down), 3: Prepaid card Default Optional Counter *CTL Type...
  • Page 440 5. System Maintenance [Counter Up Timing] 5121 This program specifies when the counter goes up. The settings refer to “paper feed” and “paper exit” respectively. 001 0:Feed 1:Exit *CTL [0: Feed / 1: Exit] [APS Mode] 5127 This program disables the APS. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 001 - *CTL...
  • Page 441 Main SP Tables-5 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 001 CE Login *CTL 0: Disabled 1: Enabled [RK4] Enables or disables the prevention for RK4 (accounting device) disconnection. 5186 If the RK4 is disconnected for 10 seconds when this SP is set to "1 (Enable)", the machine automatically jams a sheet of paper.
  • Page 442 5. System Maintenance [ 0 to 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step] 0: Disabled Usable *CTL 1: Enabled NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0 Enables or disables the summer time mode. • Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise, this SP is not activated even if this SP is set to "1".
  • Page 443 Main SP Tables-5 end tata set *CTL Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode. There are 8 digits in this SP. 1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12] 3rd digit: The week of the month. [0 to 5] 4th digit: The day of the week.
  • Page 444 5. System Maintenance Switches on/off the lock on the local address book account. 001 Lockout On/Off *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off, 1: On Sets a limit on the frequency of lockouts for account lockouts. 002 Lockout Threshold *CTL [1 to 10 / 5 / 1/step] Determines whether the system waits the...
  • Page 445 Main SP Tables-5 Sets the number of attempts to attack the system with random passwords to gain illegal access to 001 Permissible Number *CTL the system. [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 attempt/step] Sets the time limit to stop a password attack once such an attack has been detected.
  • Page 446 5. System Maintenance Sets a limit on the number of requests received for certification in order to slow down the certification speed when an excessive number of 004 Attack Max Num *CTL access attempts have been detected. [50 to 200 / 200 / 1 attempt/step] [User Authentication] These settings should be done with the System Administrator.
  • Page 447 Main SP Tables-5 Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the scan applications. 031 Scanner *CTL [0 or 1/ 0 /1]0: On , 1: Off Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the printer applications. 041 Printer *CTL [0 or 1/ 0 /1]0: On , 1: Off...
  • Page 448 5. System Maintenance 5501 [PM Alarm] *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Alarm off 001 PM Alarm Level 1 to 9999: Alarm goes off when Value (1 to 9999) x 1000 > PM counter [0 or 1 / 0 / – ] 0: No alarm sounds 002 Original Count Alarm 1: Alarm sounds after the number of originals passing...
  • Page 449 Main SP Tables-5 Continuous Door Open 0: Disable, 1: Enable Enables/disables initiating a call when the front door remains open. Jam Detection: Time Length [3 to 30 / 10 / 1/step] Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an “unattended paper jam”. This setting is enabled only when SP5508-004 is set to "1".
  • Page 450 5. System Maintenance [Individual PM Part Alarm Call] 5516 With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue a PM alarm call when one of SP parts reaches its yield. [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] Disable/Enable Setting (0:Not *CTL Send,1:Send)
  • Page 451 Main SP Tables-5 [0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step] *ENG 128: Darkest density Adjusts the Yellow correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode. [0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step] *ENG 128: Darkest density Adjusts the Magenta correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode. [0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step] *ENG 128: Darkest density...
  • Page 452 5. System Maintenance 216 Scanning *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 217 Engine Standby *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 218 Low power standby *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 219 Low noise *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 220 Fusing off standby *CTL...
  • Page 453 Main SP Tables-5 Initializes default system settings, SCS (System Control 003 SCS Service) settings, operation display coordinates, and ROM update information. 005 Mcs Initializes the Mcs settings. 006 Copier Application Initializes all copier application settings. The following service settings: • Bit switches •...
  • Page 454 5. System Maintenance [Free Run] Performs a free run on the copier engine. 5802 • The machine starts free run in the same condition as the sequence of A4/LT, A3 or A4 SEF printing from the 1st or 2nd tray. Therefore, the correct paper should be loaded in the 1st tray or 2nd tray, but paper is not fed.
  • Page 455 Main SP Tables-5 001 Fusing SC Reset [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] 002 Hard High Temp.Detection 5811 [MachineSerial] 001 Set *ENG [Execute] Displays the machine serial number. 002 Display *ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step] 5812 [Service Tel.
  • Page 456 5. System Maintenance I/F Setting Selects the remote service setting. [0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step] 0: Remote service off 1: CSS remote service on 2: NRS remote service on CE Call Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Start of the service 1: End of the service...
  • Page 457 Main SP Tables-5 RCG Write Timeout Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when sent data is written to the RCG during a call over the @Remote network. [1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second/step] RCG Read Timeout Sets the length of time (seconds) for the timeout when sent data is written from the RCG during a call over the @Remote network.
  • Page 458 5. System Maintenance Use Proxy This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine communicates with the service center. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Not use 1: Use Proxy Host This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between the RCG device and the gateway.
  • Page 459 Main SP Tables-5 Proxy Password This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password. • The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st character is ignored. • This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report. 5816 [Remote Service] *CTL...
  • Page 460 5. System Maintenance CERT: Up State Displays the status of the certification update. The certification used by Embedded RC Gate is set correctly. The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received from the GW URL and certification is presently being updated. The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the successful update.
  • Page 461 Main SP Tables-5 CERT: Error Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of the certification. Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress. Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has expired. An SSL error notification has been issued.
  • Page 462 5. System Maintenance CERT:Subject Displays the common name of the @Remote certification subject. CN = the following 17 bytes. Spaces are displayed as underscores (_). Asterisks (****) indicate that no DESS exists. CERT:Serial No. Displays serial number for the NRS certification. Asterisks (****) indicate that no DESS exists.
  • Page 463 Main SP Tables-5 Line Type Automatic Judgement Press [Execute]. Setting this SP classifies the telephone line where embedded RCG-M is connected as either dial-up (pulse dial) or push (DTMF tone) type, so embedded RCG-M can automatically distinguish the number that connects to the outside line. •...
  • Page 464 5. System Maintenance Selection Dial / Push This SP displays the classification (tone or pulse) of the telephone line to the access point for embedded RCG-M. The number displayed (0 or 1) is the result of the execution of SP5816-151. However, this setting can also be changed manually. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Tone Dialing Phone 1: Pulse Dialing Phone...
  • Page 465 Main SP Tables-5 Local Phone Number Use this SP to set the telephone number of the line where embedded RCG-M is connected. This number is transmitted to and used by the Call Center to return calls. Limit: 24 numbers (numbers only) Connection Timing Adjustment Incoming When the Call Center calls out to an embedded RCG-M modem, it sends a repeating ID tone (*#1#).
  • Page 466 5. System Maintenance Retransmission Ringing Normally, it is best to allow unlimited time for certification and ID2 update requests, and for the notification that the certification has been completed. However, RCG-M generates charges based on transmission time for the customer, so a limit is placed upon the time allowed for these transactions.
  • Page 467 Main SP Tables-5 Confirm Result Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with SP5816 203. 0: Succeeded 1: Inquiry number error 2: Registration in progress 3: Proxy error (proxy enabled) 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled) 5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password) 6: Communication error 7: Certification update error 8: Other error...
  • Page 468 5. System Maintenance Error Code Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either SP5816-204 or SP5816-207 was executed. [-2147483647 to 2147483647 / 0 / - ] Cause Code Meaning -11001 Chat parameter error Illegal Modem Parameter -11002 Chat execution error -11003...
  • Page 469 Main SP Tables-5 5816 [Remote Service] *CTL Error Code Cause Code Meaning Attempted dial up overseas without the -2385 correct international prefix for the telephone number. -2387 Not supported at the Service Center -2389 Database out of service -2390 Program out of service -2391 Two registrations for same device Error Caused by Response...
  • Page 470 5. System Maintenance Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial number) from the 001 NV-RAM Data Upload NVRAM to an SD card. [EXECUTE] 5825 [NV-RAM Data Download] Downloads the UP and SP mode data from an SD card to the NVRAM.
  • Page 471 Main SP Tables-5 Protocol Using Status Used or not used the network. [0 or 1 / 0x00000000 / 1/step] 0: Off (Not used the network with the protocol.) 1: On (Used the network with the protocol once or more.) bit0: IPsec, bit1: IPv6, bit2: IEEE 802. 1X, bit3:Wireless LAN, bit4: Security mode level setting, bit5:Appletalk, bit6: DHCP, bit7: DHCPv6, bit8: telnet, bit9: SSL, bit10: HTTPS, bit11: BMLinkS printing, bit12: diprint printing, bit13: LPR printing,...
  • Page 472 Consumable Supplier bit2-15: Reserved (all) Web shopping link visible Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH on the top page and link page of the web system. [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Not display, 1:Display...
  • Page 473 Main SP Tables-5 Web Link1 Name This SP confirms or changes the URL1 name on the link page of the web system. The maximum characters for the URL name are 31 characters. Web Link1 URL This SP confirms or changes the link to URL1 on the link page of the web system. The maximum characters for the URL are 127 characters.
  • Page 474 5. System Maintenance 001 HDD Formatting (ALL) 002 HDD Formatting (IMH) 003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail) 004 HDD Formatting (Job Log) 005 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts) Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP mode 006 HDD Formatting (User Info) only if there is a hard disk error. 007 HDD Formatting (Mail RX Data) 008 HDD Formatting (Mail TX Data) 009 HDD Formatting (Data for a Design)
  • Page 475 Main SP Tables-5 1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2: 077 Reduction for Printer Color 1200dpi skipped) , 6: 2/3 1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2: 078 Reduction for Printer B&W 1200dpi skipped) , 6: 2/3 5836-81 to 5836-86, Stored document format The following 6 SP modes set the default format for stored documents sent to the document management server via the MLB.
  • Page 476 5. System Maintenance This is basically adjusted by the remote 103 Primary srv port number system. This is basically adjusted by the remote 104 Primary srv URL path system. Sets the IP address for the secondary capture 111 Secondary srv IP address server.
  • Page 477 Main SP Tables-5 Reso: Scanner(Color) [0 to 6 / 4 / 1/step] Selects the resolution for color scanning mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote system. 0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi/ 6: 75dpi Reso: Scanner(Mono) [0 to 6 / 3 / 1/step] Selects the resolution for BW scanning mode.
  • Page 478 5. System Maintenance [0 x 00 to 0 x FF / 0 x FF to Auto / -] 0 x FF to Auto [Default] 0 x 11 - 55M Fix 0 x 10 - 48M Fix 0 x 0F - 36M Fix 0 x 0E - 18M Fix 0 x 0D - 12M Fix 008 Transmission Speed...
  • Page 479 Main SP Tables-5 Selects the debug level for WPA authentication application. 045 WPA Debug Lvl *CTL [1 to 3 / 3 / 1] 1: Info, 2: warning, 3: error] This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802.11 card is installed. 5841 [Supply Name Setting] 001 Toner Name Setting:Black...
  • Page 480 5. System Maintenance [Delivery Server Setting] *CTL 5845 Provides items for delivery server settings. FTP Port No. [1 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step] Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server. Range:000.000.000.000 to IP Address (Primary) 255.255.255.255 Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address.
  • Page 481 Main SP Tables-5 Delivery Svr. Capability [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step] Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible Changes the Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists capability of the registered that the Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists...
  • Page 482 5. System Maintenance Server URL Path (Secondary) DFU This is used for the scan router program. Rapid Sending Control Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending error. [0 to 1 / 1 / -] 0: Disable, 1: Enable [Rep Resolution Reduction] *CTL SP5847-1 through SP5847-8 changes the default settings of image data transferred...
  • Page 483 Main SP Tables-5 0000: No access control 002 Access Ctrl: Repository (only Lower 4 bits) 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder. 0010: No writing control Access Control: Doc. Svr. Print (Lower 4 bits) Access Control: udirectory (Lower 4 bits) Access Ctrl: Comm. Log Fax (Lower 4 bits) Switches access control on and off.
  • Page 484 5. System Maintenance Determines whether the installation date is printed on the printout for the total counter. [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 002 Switch to Print 0: OFF (No Print) 1: ON (Print) Displays the total counter at set the setting day (SP5849-001).
  • Page 485 Main SP Tables-5 Save to HDD Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the HDD. A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to each SD Card.
  • Page 486 5. System Maintenance Turns on/off the debug save for jam errors. 004 Jam(0:OFF 1:ON) [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step] 5859 [Debug Save Key No.] *CTL 001 Key 1 002 Key 2 003 Key 3 004 Key 4 These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for 005 Key 5 functions that use common memory on the controller...
  • Page 487 Main SP Tables-5 SMTP Auth. Direct Setting [0 or 1 / - / – ] Selects the authentication method for SMPT. Bit switch: • Bit 0: LOGIN • Bit 1: PLAIN • Bit 2: CRAM MD5 • Bit 3: DIGEST MD5 •...
  • Page 488 5. System Maintenance 5873 [SDCardAppliMove] This SP copies the application programs from 001 MoveExec *CTL the original SD card in SD card slot 2 to an SD card in SD card slot 1. This SP copies back the application programs from an SD card in SD Card Slot 2 to the original SD card in SD card slot 1.
  • Page 489 Main SP Tables-5 5881 [Fixed Phrase Block Erasing] 001 - *CTL Deletes the fixed phrase. [Set WIM Function] Web Image Monitor Settings 5885 Close or disclose the functions of web image monitor. 0: OFF, 1: ON Bit Meaning 0: Forbid all document server access (1) 1: Forbid user mode access (1) 2: Forbid print function (1) 020 DocSvr Acc Ctrl...
  • Page 490 5. System Maintenance 002 SDK-2 003 SDK-3 004 SDK-4 005 SDK-5 006 SDK-6 [External Counter Setting] 5894 Test Name1_1 001 Switch Charge Mode *ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] 5907 [Plug & Play Maker/Model Name] *CTL Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play. This information is stored in the NVRAM.
  • Page 491 Main SP Tables-5 001 (0:Light 1:Full) *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / – ] 5987 [Mech Counter] This SP detects that a mechanical counter 001 0: OFF / 1: ON *ENG device is removed. If it is detected, SC610 occurs.
  • Page 492 5. System Maintenance 001 All(Data List) *CTL 002 SP(Mode Data List) *CTL 003 User Program *CTL 004 Logging Data *CTL 005 Diagnostic Report *CTL 006 Non-Default *CTL 007 NIB Summary *CTL Press “Execute” key to start exporting the SMC data in the SP mode display. 008 Capture Log *CTL 021 Copier User Program...

  • Page 493: Main Sp Tables-6

    Main SP Tables-6 Main SP Tables-6 SP6-XXX (Peripherals) 6006 [ADF Adjustment] 001 Face *ENG Adjusts the side-to-side and leading registration of originals with the ARDF. 002 Side-to-Side *ENG [-2.0 to 2.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step ] 003 Leading Edge Duplex Front *ENG Adjusts the side-to-side and leading registration of originals with the ARDF.
  • Page 494 5. System Maintenance [ADF Free Run] 6009 Performs a DF free run in simplex, duplex mode or stamp mode. 001 Simplex Motion *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step ] 002 Duplex Motion *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step ] [ADF Adjustment Magnification] 6017 Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan direction for the ARDF.

  • Page 495: Main Sp Tables-7

    Main SP Tables-7 Main SP Tables-7 SP7-XXX (Data Log) [Total SC] 7401 Displays the number of SC codes detected. *CTL [00000 to 65535 / - / -/step] 001 SC Counter 002 Total SC Counter [SC History] Logs the SC codes detected. 7403 The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are not displayed on the screen, but can be seen on the SMC (logging) outputs.
  • Page 496 5. System Maintenance [SC991 History] Logs the SC Code 991 detected. 7404 The 10 most recently detected SC Code 991s are not displayed on the screen, but can be seen on the SMC (logging) outputs. *CTL 001 Latest 002 Latest 1 003 Latest 2 004 Latest 3 005 Latest 4...
  • Page 497 Main SP Tables-7 [Paper Jam Count by Location] ON: On check, OFF: Off check 7504 Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were detected. For details, see "Jam Detection". *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / -/step] 001 At Power On 003 1st Paper Feed SN: Late 004 2nd Paper Feed SN: Late...
  • Page 498 5. System Maintenance [Original Jam Detection0] ON: On check, OFF: Off Check 7505 Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were detected. For details, see "Jam Detection". *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 001 At Power On 003 Separation Sensor: On 004 Skew Correction Sn: On 005 Scanning Entrance Sn: On...
  • Page 499 Main SP Tables-7 132 A3 SEF 133 A4 SEF 134 A5 SEF 141 B4 SEF 142 B5 SEF 160 DLT SEF 164 LG SEF 166 LT SEF 172 HLT SEF 255 Others [Plotter Jam History] 7507 Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams. *CTL 001 Latest 002 Latest 1...
  • Page 500 5. System Maintenance [Original Jam History] 7508 Displays the 10 most recently detected original paper jams. *CTL 001 Latest 002 Latest 1 003 Latest 2 004 Latest 3 005 Latest 4 006 Latest 5 007 Latest 6 008 Latest 7 009 Latest 8 010 Latest 9 [Part Replacement Operation ON/OFF]...
  • Page 501 Main SP Tables-7 009 Developer: Bk 010 Developer: M 011 Developer: C 012 Developer: Y 013 Image Transfer Belt 014 Image Transfer Cleaning Unit 015 Fusing Unit 016 Paper Transfer Roller Unit 017 Waste Toner bottle 018 Fusing Roller 019 Pressure Roller [ROM No/ Firmware Version] 7801 Displays all versions and ROM numbers in the machine.
  • Page 502 5. System Maintenance Displays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit. PM counters click up based on the number of A4 (LT) LEF size sheets printed. Therefore, the A3 (DLT) Double Count is activated. The Double Count cannot be deactivated. When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit is installed.
  • Page 503 Main SP Tables-7 017 Page: Fusing Roller 018 Page: Fusing Belt 019 Page: Second Image Transfer 020 Page: Toner Correction Bottle 022 Page: Fusing Pad 023 Page: Lubricant: PCU: K 024 Page: Lubricant: PCU: C 025 Page: Lubricant: PCU: M 026 Page: Lubricant: PCU: Y 027 Page: Lubricant: Image Transfer 7803...
  • Page 504 5. System Maintenance 040 Rotation: Developer: C 041 Rotation: Developer: M 042 Rotation: Developer: Y 043 Rotation: Image Transfer Belt 044 Rotation: Image Transfer Clean 045 Rotation: Fusing Unit 046 Rotation: Fusing Roller 047 Rotation: Fusing Belt 048 Rotation: Second Image Transfer [PM Counter Display] (Page, Unit, [Color]) 7803 Displays the total amount of each waste toner bottle.
  • Page 505 Main SP Tables-7 [PM Counter Display] (Page, Unit, [Color]) 7803 [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1/step] 057 Time: Toner Sub Hopper: K 058 Time: Toner Sub Hopper: C 059 Time: Toner Sub Hopper: M 060 Time: Toner Sub Hopper: Y 7803 [PM Counter Display] (Page, Unit, [Color]) Displays the value given by the following formula:...
  • Page 506 5. System Maintenance 073 Rotation (%): Image Transfer 074 Rotation (%): Cleaning Unit 075 Rotation (%): Fusing Unit 076 Rotation (%): Fusing Roller 077 Rotation (%): Fusing Sleeve 078 Rotation (%):Second Image Transfer 7803 [PM Counter Display] (Page, Unit, [Color]) Displays the value given by the following formula: (Current revolution / Target revolution) ×...
  • Page 507 Main SP Tables-7 084 Rotation (%): Lubricant: PCU: M 085 Rotation (%): Lubricant: PCU: Y 086 Rotation (%): Lubricant: Image Transfer 7803 [PM Counter Display] (Page, Unit, [Color]) Displays the value given by the following formula: (Target printouts / Current printouts) 100.
  • Page 508 5. System Maintenance 106 Page (%): Fusing Roller 107 Page (%): Fusing Sleeve 108 Page (%): Second Image Transfer 7803 [PM Counter Display] (Page, Unit, [Color]) Displays the value given by the following formula: (Target printouts / Current printouts) 100. This shows how much of the unit's expected lifetime has been used up.
  • Page 509 Main SP Tables-7 7804 [PM Counter Reset] PM Counter Clear (Unit, [Color]) Clears the PM counter. Press the Enter key after the machine asks “Execute?”, which will store the PM countervalue in SP7-906 (PM Counter - Previous) and reset the value of the current PM counter (SP7-803) to “0”.
  • Page 510 5. System Maintenance 021 Fusing Sleeve 022 Second Image Transfer 023 Toner Correction Bottle 025 Fusing Pad 026 Lubricant: PCU: K 027 Lubricant: PCU: C 028 Lubricant: PCU: M 029 Lubricant: PCU: Y 030 Lubricant: PCU: All 031 Lubricant: Image Transfer 032 Toner Sub Hopper: K 033 Toner Sub Hopper: C 034 Toner Sub Hopper: M...
  • Page 511 Main SP Tables-7 [Self-Diagnose Result Display] 7832 Displays the result of the diagnostics. [- / - / -] 001 Diag. Result [ACC Counter] 7835 Displays the number of times of ACC counter. *CTL [0 to 9999999 / - / -/step] 001 Copy ACC 002 Printer ACC [Total Memory Size]...
  • Page 512 5. System Maintenance 003 PCU: M 004 PCU: Y 005 Development Unit: K 006 Development Unit: C 007 Development Unit: M 008 Development Unit: Y 009 Developer: K 010 Developer: C 011 Developer: M 012 Developer: Y 013 Image Transfer 014 Cleaning Unit 015 Fusing Unit 016 Fusing Roller...
  • Page 513 Main SP Tables-7 [Assert Info.] Records the location where a problem is detected in the program. The data stored in this SP 7901 is used for problem analysis. DFU *CTL 001 File Name 002 Number of Lines 003 Location [Prev. Unit PM Counter] 7906 (Page or Rotations, Unit, [Color]), Dev.: Development Unit Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance units.
  • Page 514 5. System Maintenance 016 Page: Fusing Roller 017 Page: Fusing Sleeve 018 Page: Second Image Transfer 019 Page: Toner Collection Bottle 020 Page: Fusing Pad 022 Page: Lubricant: PCU: K 023 Page: Lubricant: PCU: C 024 Page: Lubricant: PCU: M 025 Page: Lubricant: PCU: Y 026 Page: Lubricant: Image Transfer [Prev.
  • Page 515 Main SP Tables-7 042 Rotation: Developer: Y 043 Rotation: Image Transfer 044 Rotation: Cleaning Unit 045 Rotation: Fusing Unit 046 Rotation: Fusing Roller 047 Rotation: Fusing Belt 048 Rotation: Second Image Transfer 049 Measurement: Toner Collection bottle 051 Rotation: Fusing Pad 052 Rotation: Lubricant: PCU: K 053 Rotation: Lubricant: PCU: C 054 Rotation: Lubricant: PCU: M...
  • Page 516 5. System Maintenance 067 Rotation %: Development Unit: M 068 Rotation %: Development Unit: Y 069 Rotation %: Developer: K 070 Rotation %: Developer: C 071 Rotation %: Developer: M 072 Rotation %: Developer: Y 073 Rotation %: Image Transfer 074 Rotation %: Cleaning Unit 075 Rotation %: Fusing Unit 076 Rotation %: Fusing Roller...
  • Page 517 Main SP Tables-7 092 Page %: PCU: C 093 Page %: PCU: M 094 Page %: PCU: Y 095 Page %: Development Unit: K 096 Page %: Development Unit: C 097 Page %: Development Unit: M 098 Page %: Development Unit: Y 099 Page %: Developer: K 100 Page %: Developer: C 101 Page %: Developer: M...
  • Page 518 5. System Maintenance Displays the number of revolutions of motors or clutches at low speed for each previous 121 to maintenance unit. [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/step] 121 Rotation: Low Speed: PCU: K 122 Rotation: Low Speed: PCU: C 123 Rotation: Low Speed: PCU: M 124 Rotation: Low Speed: PCU: Y [Toner Bottle Bk]...
  • Page 519 Main SP Tables-7 Area ID Refill Information 793x-004 793x-015 [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step] [0 to 1 / - / 1 /step] Product ID Attachment: Total Counter 793x-005 793x-016 [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step] [0 to 99999999 / - / 1 /step] Color ID Attachment: Color Counter...
  • Page 520 5. System Maintenance [Toner Bottle Log 1: Y] 7938 Displays the toner bottle information log for Ye. *ENG Last three digits for 7935 to 7938 Serial No. 793x-001 [0 to 1 / - / 1 /step] Attachment Date 793x-002 [0 to 1 / - / 1 /step] Displays the toner bottle information log 1 for Bk, Ma, Cy, or Ye.
  • Page 521 Main SP Tables-7 Serial No. 793x-031 [0 to 1 / - / 1 /step] Attachment Date 793x-032 [0 to 99999999 / - / 1 /step] Displays the toner bottle information log 4 for Bk, Ma, Cy, or Ye. Attachment: Total Counter 793x-033 [0 to 1 / - / 1 /step] Refill Information...
  • Page 522 5. System Maintenance 015 PCU: M 016 PCU: Y 017 Development Unit: K 018 Development Unit: C 019 Development Unit: M 020 Development Unit: Y 021 Fusing Pad 022 Lubricant: PCU: K 023 Lubricant: PCU: C 024 Lubricant: PCU: M 025 Lubricant: PCU: Y 026 Lubricant: Image Transfer 7951...
  • Page 523 Main SP Tables-7 011 Page: Developer:Unit: M 012 Page: Developer:Unit: Y 013 Page: Image Transfer 014 Page: Cleaning Unit 015 Page: Fusing Unit 016 Page: Fusing Roller 017 Page: Fusing Sleeve 018 Page: Second Image Transfer 019 Page: Fusing Pad 022 Page: Lubricant: PCU: K 023 Page: Lubricant: PCU: C 024 Page: Lubricant: PCU: M...
  • Page 524 5. System Maintenance 039 Rotation: Developer: K 040 Rotation: Developer: C 041 Rotation: Developer: M 042 Rotation: Developer: Y 043 Rotation: Image Transfer 044 Rotation: Cleaning Unit 045 Rotation: Fusing Unit 046 Rotation: Fusing Roller 047 Rotation: Fusing Sleeve 048 Rotation: Second Image Transfer 049 Measurement : Toner Collection bottle 050 Rotation: Fusing Pad 052 Rotation: Lubricant: PCU: K...
  • Page 525 Main SP Tables-7 110 Minimum : Developer: C 111 Minimum : Developer: M 112 Minimum : Developer: Y 113 Minimum : Image Transfer 114 Minimum : Cleaning Unit 115 Minimum : Fusing Unit 116 Minimum : Fusing Roller 117 Minimum : Fusing Sleeve 118 Minimum : Second Image Transfer 119 Minimum : Toner Collection bottle 120 Minimum : Fusing Pad...
  • Page 526 5. System Maintenance 007 Life Measurement:Tone Collection Bottle [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mg/step] 011 Life Page: Image Transfer [0 to 999999 / - / 1 sheet/step] 012 Life Page: Cleaning Unit [0 to 999999 / - / 1 sheet/step] 013 Life Page: Fusing Unit 014 Life Page: Fusing Roller [0 to 999999 / - / 1 sheet/step]...
  • Page 527 Main SP Tables-7 031 Days threshold: Developer: M 032 Days threshold: Developer: Y 033 Days threshold: Image Transfer 034 Days threshold: Cleaning Unit 035 Days threshold: Fusing Unit 036 Days threshold: Fusing Roller 037 Days threshold: Fusing Sleeve 7952 [PM Yield Setting] Adjusts the threshold rotation of the near end for each PM unit.
  • Page 528 5. System Maintenance 050 Life Page: PCU: K 051 Life Page: PCU: C 052 Life Page: PCU: M 053 Life Page: PCU: Y 054 Life Page: Development Unit: K 055 Life Page: Development Unit: C 056 Life Page: Development Unit: M 057 Life Page: Development Unit: Y 058 Life Page: Developer: K 059 Life Page: Developer: C...
  • Page 529 Main SP Tables-7 Adjusts the threshold rotation of the near end for each PM unit. 075 to [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/step] These threshold days are used for @Remote alarms. 075 Life Rotation: Fusing Pad 076 Life Rotation: Lubricant: PCU: K 077 Life Rotation: Lubricant: PCU: C 078 Life Rotation: Lubricant: PCU: M 079 Life Rotation: Lubricant: PCU: Y...
  • Page 530 5. System Maintenance 003 0<T<=5:30<=H<70 004 0<T<=5:70<=H<=100 005 5<T<15:0<=H<30 006 5<T<15:30<=H<55 007 5<T<15:55<=H<80 008 5<T<15:80<=H<=100 009 15<=T<25:0<=H<30 010 15<=T<25:30<=H<55 011 15<=T<25:55<=H<80 012 15<=T<25:80<=H<=100 013 25<=T<30:0<=H<30 014 25<=T<30:30<=H<55 015 25<=T<30:55<=H<80 016 25<=T<30:80<=H<=100 017 30<=T<35:0<=H<30 018 30<=T<35:30<=H<55 019 30<=T<35:55<=H<80 020 30<=T<35:80<=H<=100 021 35<=T [Operation Env.] 7954 Clear the usage environment log.

  • Page 531: Main Sp Tables-8

    Main SP Tables-8 Main SP Tables-8 SP8-XXX (Data Log2) Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination with others, can provide useful information.
  • Page 532 5. System Maintenance Prefixes What it means Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server. The L: counters work differently case by case. Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored on the document server; this can be in document server mode (from the document server Local storage (document window), or from another mode, such as from a printer server)
  • Page 533 Main SP Tables-8 Abbreviation What it means Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print) used to DesApl store the job on the document server, for example. Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed. Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides Emul Emulation Full Color...
  • Page 534 5. System Maintenance Abbreviation What it means Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the network, and Palm 2 allows files to moved around, combined, and converted to different formats.
  • Page 535 Main SP Tables-8 • All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear. T:Total Jobs *CTL 8 001 These SPs count the number of times each application is used to do a job. 8 002 C:Total Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1]...
  • Page 536 5. System Maintenance • When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments. • When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter increments. •...
  • Page 537 Main SP Tables-8 • When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the C: and P: counters both increment. • When a job already on the document server is printed with another application, the L: counter increments.
  • Page 538 5. System Maintenance 8 041 T:TX Jobs/LS *CTL These SPs count the applications that stored files on the document server that were later accessed for 8 042 C:TX Jobs/LS *CTL transmission over the telephone line or over a network (attached to an e-mail, or as a fax image 8 043 F:TX Jobs/LS *CTL...
  • Page 539 Main SP Tables-8 F:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is specified by the 8 063 application. Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time. P:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1]...
  • Page 540 5. System Maintenance 8 06x 007 Other Reserved. Not used. 8 06x 008 Inside-Fold Not used 8 06x 009 Three-IN-Fold Not used 8 06x 010 Three-OUT-Fold Not used 8 06x 011 Four-Fold Not used 8 06x 012 KANNON-Fold Not used 8 06x 013 Perfect-Bind Not used 8 06x 014 Ring-Bind...
  • Page 541 Main SP Tables-8 O:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] 8 077 These SPs count and calculate the number of "Other" application jobs (Web Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the job. Last three digits for SP8 071 to 077 8 07x 001 1 Page 8 07x 8...
  • Page 542 5. System Maintenance F: FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by fax directly on 8 113 a telephone line. Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time. 8 11x 001 B/W 8 11x 002 Color •...
  • Page 543 Main SP Tables-8 S: S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] 8 135 These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and attached to e- mail, without storing the original on the document server. 8 13x 001 B/W 8 13x 002 Color 8 13x 003 ACS •...
  • Page 544 5. System Maintenance • If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting to be delivered, the job is not counted. • If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
  • Page 545 Main SP Tables-8 8 171 T:Deliv Jobs/WSD *CTL These SPs count the pages scanned by WS. [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] 8 175 S:Deliv Jobs/WSD *CTL -001 B/W -002 Color -003 ACS 8 181 T:Scan to Media Jobs *CTL These SPs count the scanned pages in a media by the scanner application.
  • Page 546 5. System Maintenance T:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] A3/DLT, Larger 8 201 These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan and copy -001 jobs. Large size paper scanned for fax transmission is not counted. Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display.
  • Page 547 Main SP Tables-8 • If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6. • If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6. ADF Org Feeds *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1]...
  • Page 548 5. System Maintenance 8 231 Custom Size Selectable. Originals of non-standard size. -004 8 231 Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the original Platen directly on the platen. -005 8 231 Mixed 1side/ 2side Simplex and Duplex mode. -006 •...
  • Page 549 Main SP Tables-8 8 24x-002: Text/Photo 8 24x-003: Photo 8 24x-004: GenCopy, Pale 8 24x-005: Map 8 24x-006: Normal/Detail 8 24x-007: Fine/Super Fine 8 24x-008: Binary 8 24x-009: Grayscale 8 24x-010: Color 8 24x-011: Other • If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
  • Page 550 5. System Maintenance 8 265 S:Scn PGS/Color *CTL 8 266 L:Scn PGS/ColCr *CTL Last three digits for SP8 261, 262, 265 and 266 8 26x-001 Color Conversion 8 26x-002 Color Erase These SPs show how many times color creation features have been selected at the operation panel. 8 26x-003 Background 8 26x-004 Other 8 281...
  • Page 551 Main SP Tables-8 F:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] 8 303 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-443]. S:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1]...
  • Page 552 5. System Maintenance 8 31x-003 400 dpi to 599 dpi 8 31x-004 200 dpi to 399 dpi 8 31x-005 199 dpi or less • Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted. • The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count is done for the Fax application.
  • Page 553 Main SP Tables-8 - Error notification reports. - Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam. LSize PrtPGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] A3/DLT, Larger 8 391-001 These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A4/LT and larger. Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
  • Page 554 5. System Maintenance F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] 8 423 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the fax application. P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] 8 424 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the printer application.
  • Page 555 Main SP Tables-8 8 42x-012 Booklet 8 42x-013 Magazine 8 42x-014 2in1 + Booklet 8 42x-015 4in1 + Booklet 8 42x-016 6in1 + Booklet 8 42x-017 8in1 + Booklet 8 42x-018 9in1 + Booklet 8 42x-019 2in1 + Magazine 8 42x-020 4in1 + Magazine 8 42x-021 6in1 + Magazine 8 42x-022 8in1 + Magazine 8 42x-023 9in1 + Magazine...
  • Page 556 5. System Maintenance Booklet Magazine Original Pages Count Original Pages Count T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] 8 431 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below, regardless of which application was used. C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1]...
  • Page 557 Main SP Tables-8 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] 8 442 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the copy application. F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] 8 443 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax application.
  • Page 558 5. System Maintenance 8 44x-255 Other (Custom) • These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF. PrtPGS/Ppr Tray *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] 8 451 These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station. 8 451-001 Bypass Tray Bypass Tray 8 451-002 Tray 1...
  • Page 559 Main SP Tables-8 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications. • These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers.
  • Page 560 5. System Maintenance PrtPGS/Mag *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] 8 471 These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed. 8 471-001 49% or less 8 471-002 50% to 99% 8 471-003 100% 8 471-004 101% to 200% 8 471-005 201% or more •...
  • Page 561 Main SP Tables-8 Last three digits for SP8 491 to 493, 496 and 497 8 49x-001 B/W 8 49x-002 Single Color 8 49x-003 Two Color 8 49x-004 Full Color 8 501 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL These SPs count the number of pages 8 504 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL...
  • Page 562 5. System Maintenance 8 51x-007 8 51x-008 RTIFF 8 51x-009 8 51x-010 PCL5e/5c 8 51x-011 PCL XL 8 51x-012 IPDL-C 8 51x-013 BM-Links Japan Only 8 51x-014 Other 8 51x-015 IPDS • SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application. •...
  • Page 563 Main SP Tables-8 L:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / - / 1] 8 526 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel. Last three digits for SP8 521 to 526 8 52x-001 Sort 8 52x-008 Inside-Fold 8 52x-002 Stack...
  • Page 564 5. System Maintenance 8 562 C:A Sheet Of Paper *CTL [0 to 9999999 / - / 1] 8 563 F:A Sheet Of Paper *CTL [0 to 9999999 / - / 1] 8 564 P:A Sheet Of Paper *CTL [0 to 9999999 / - / 1] 8 566 L:A Sheet Of Paper *CTL...
  • Page 565 Main SP Tables-8 8 581-013 Full Color: B4 JIS or Smaller 8 581-014 Full Color Print 8 581-015 Mono Color Print 8 581-016 Full Color GPC 8 581-017 Twin Colour Mode Print 8 581-018 Full Colour Print(Twin) 8 581-019 Mono Colour Print(Twin) 8 581-020 Full Colour Total(CV) 8 581-021 Mono Colour Total(CV) 8 581-022 Full Colour Print(CV)
  • Page 566 5. System Maintenance P:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] 8 584 These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down by color output. 8 584-001 B/W 8 584-002 Mono Color 8 584-003 Full Color 8 584-004 Single Color 8 584-005 Two Color L:Counter *CTL...
  • Page 567 Main SP Tables-8 8 601-021 Coverage Counter 1 8 601-022 Coverage Counter 2 8 601-023 Coverage Counter 3 8 601-031 Coverage Counter 1 (YMC) 8 601-032 Coverage Counter 2 (YMC) 8 601-033 Coverage Counter 3 (YMC) C:Coverage Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] 8 602 These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout pages for each printing mode.
  • Page 568 5. System Maintenance 8 617-001 SDK-1 8 617-002 SDK-2 8 617-003 SDK-3 8 617-004 SDK-4 8 617-005 SDK-5 8 617-006 SDK-6 8621 Func Use Counter DFU 001 to 064 Function 001 to Function 064 T:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] 8 631 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone number.
  • Page 569 Main SP Tables-8 F:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] 8 643 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax images using I-Fax. 8 64x-001 B/W 8 64x-002 Color • If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted separately as B/W or Color.
  • Page 570 5. System Maintenance 10-page document is sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.). T:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] 8 661 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server by both Scan and LS applications.
  • Page 571 Main SP Tables-8 • This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC through the copier to the destination. • When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting, the pages are only counted once.
  • Page 572 5. System Maintenance 8 701-004 ISDN (G3,G4) 8 701-005 Network 8 711 T:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] S:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] 8 715 These SPs count the number of pages sent by each compression mode. 8 71x-001 JPEG/JPEG2000 8 71x-002 TIFF(Multi/Single) 8 71x-003 PDF...
  • Page 573 Main SP Tables-8 RX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] 8 741 These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to receive them. 8 741-001 PSTN-1 8 741-002 PSTN-2 8 741-003 PSTN-3 8 741-004 ISDN (G3,G4) 8 741-005 Network Dev Counter *CTL...
  • Page 574 5. System Maintenance LS Memory Remain *CTL [0 to 100 / - / 1] 8 791 This SP displays the percent of space available on the document server for storing documents. Toner Remain *CTL [0 to 100/ - / 1] These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color.
  • Page 575 Main SP Tables-8 Full Color(%) *CTL [0 to 100/ - / 1] 8 811-007 Displays the utilization ratio of the full color function. Duplex(%) *CTL [0 to 100/ - / 1] 8 811-008 Displays the utilization ratio of the duplex function. Combine(%) *CTL [0 to 100/ - / 1]...
  • Page 576 5. System Maintenance Paper Cut(%):Last *CTL [0 to 100/ - / 1] 8 811-110 CVr Cnt: 0-10% *ENG [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] 8 851 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is from 0% to 10%.
  • Page 577 Main SP Tables-8 8 871-003 M 8 871-004 C CVr Cnt: 31%- *ENG [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] 8 881 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is 31% or higher. 8 881-001 BK 8 881-002 Y 8 881-003 M...
  • Page 578 5. System Maintenance 8 911-002 Y 8 911-003 M 8 911-004 C Cvr Cnt/Total *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] 8 921 Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color. 8 921-001 Coverage (%) BK 8 921-002 Coverage (%) Y 8 921-003 Coverage (%) M 8 921-004 Coverage (%) C 8 921-011 Coverage /P: BK...
  • Page 579 Main SP Tables-8 Includes time while machine is performing 8 941-005 Off Mode Time background printing. Does not include time machine remains powered off with the power switches. 8 941-006 SC Total time when SC errors have been staying. Total time when paper jams have been staying during 8 941-007 PrtJam printing.
  • Page 580 5. System Maintenance Electricity Status *CTL [0 to 9999999/ - / 1] 8 961 8 961-001 Ctrl Standby Time 8 961-002 STR Time 8 961-003 Main Power Off Time 8 961-004 Reading and Printing Time 8 961-005 Printing Time 8 961-006 Reading Time 8 961-007 Eng Waiting Time 8 961-008 Low Power State Time 8 961-009 Silent State Time...
  • Page 581 Main SP Tables-8 8 999-022 Copy: Full Color(%) 8 999-104 Scanner Transmission: Color 8 999-023 Copy: BW(%) 8 999-105 Scanner Transmission: BW...

  • Page 582: Main Sp Tables-9

    5. System Maintenance Main SP Tables-9 Input Check Table When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit corresponds to a different device as shown in the table. Bit No. Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1...
  • Page 583 Main SP Tables-9 Reading 5803 Description 5803-016 ITB Contact HP Sensor Not contact Contact 5803-017 Paper Transfer Contact Sensor Not contact Contact 5803-018 ITB New Unit Detection (Not used) 5803-019 Toner Collection Full Sensor Not full Full 5803-020 Toner Collection Bottle Set Not set 5803-021 Toner Collection Motor Set: C (Not used)
  • Page 584 5. System Maintenance Reading 5803 Description 5803-041 Fusing Motor: Lock Lock Normal 5803-042 Transport Motor: Lock Lock Normal 5803-043 PP:D:SC Detection SC detected No SC 5803-044 PP:CB:SC Detection SC detected No SC 5803-045 PP:T1T2:SC Detection SC detected No SC 5803-046 Mechanical Counter: Set Not set 5803-047 Key Counter 1: Set Not set...

  • Page 585: Output Check Table

    Main SP Tables-9 Output Check Table Copier 5804 Display Description 5804-001 Registration Clutch 5804-002 Paper Feed Clutch 5804-003 Duplex Clutch 5804-004 Bypass Feed Clutch 5804-005 Bypass Lift Clutch 5804-006 Inverter Solenoid 5804-007 Tray Lift Motor 5804-008 Exit Junction Solenoid 5804-009 Fusing Air Flow Fan: H 5804-010 Fusing Air Flow Fan: L 5804-011 LD Unit Fan: H 5804-012 LD Unit Fan: L...
  • Page 586 5. System Maintenance 5804 Display Description 5804-024 Fc Development Motor: H 5804-025 Fc Development Motor: L 5804-026 Development Clutch: Bk 5804-027 Fc Drum Motor: H 5804-028 Fc Drum Motor: L 5804-029 Fusing Motor: H 5804-030 Fusing Motor: L 5804-031 Transport Motor: H 5804-032 Transport Motor: L 5804-033 ITB/Paper Trans Contact Motor 5804-034 Paper Transfer Contact Motor...
  • Page 587 Main SP Tables-9 5804 Display Description 5804-051 PP:Development: K 5804-052 PP:Separation 5804-053 PP:T1: Y 5804-054 PP:T1: M 5804-055 PP:T1: C 5804-056 PP:T1: K 5804-057 PP:T2: + 5804-058 PP:T2: - 5804-059 PP:Charge AC:Y: H 5804-060 PP:Charge AC:Y: L 5804-061 PP:Charge AC:M: H 5804-062 PP:Charge AC:M: L 5804-063 PP:Charge AC:C: H 5804-064 PP:Charge AC:C: L...

  • Page 588: Printer Service Mode

    5. System Maintenance 5804 Display Description 5804-082 BANK_Motor2:High 5804-083 BANK_Motor2:Low 5804-084 BANK_FEED_CL1 5804-085 BANK_FEED_CL2 5804-086 BANK_VFEED_CL1 5804-087 BANK_VFEED_CL2 5804-104 Polygon Moter1: LL 5804-108 Polygon Moter2: LL 5804-112 Polygon Moter1,2: LL 5804-202 Scanner Lamp: Color 600 5804-203 Scanner Lamp: Color 1200 5804-204 Scanner Lamp: Bk 5804-216 LD1: K 5804-218 LD1: Ma...
  • Page 589 Main SP Tables-9 1001 Bit Switch bit 3 No I/O Timeout 0: Disable 1: Enable Enable: The machine I/O Timeout setting will have no affect. I/O Timeouts will never occur. bit 4 SD Card Save Mode 0: Disable 1: Enable Enable: Print jobs will be saved to an SD card in the GW SD slot and not output to paper.
  • Page 590 5. System Maintenance 1001 Bit Switch 003 Bit Switch 3 bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility 0: Disable 1: Enable Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000. In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A") will be changed to "<ESC>*r1A".
  • Page 591 Main SP Tables-9 1001 Bit Switch bit 1 Multiple copies if a paper size or type mismatch 0: Disable 1: Enable occurs (Single (Multiple copy) copy) If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple copies, only a single copy is output by default.
  • Page 592 5. System Maintenance 1001 Bit Switch bit 7 Letterhead mode printing 1: Enable 0: Disable (Duplex) Routes all pages through the duplex unit. If this is disabled, simplex pages or the last page of an odd-paged duplex job are not routed through the duplex unit. This could result in problems with letterhead/pre- printed pages.
  • Page 593 Main SP Tables-9 1001 Bit Switch 008 Bit Switch 8 bit 0 to 2 bit 3 [PCL.PS]: Allow BW jobs to print without requiring 1: Enable User Code (allow BW 0: Disable jobs to print without a user code) BW jobs submitted without a user code will be printed even if usercode authentication is enabled.
  • Page 594 5. System Maintenance 1001 Bit Switch bit 3 bit 4 Timing of the PJL Status ReadBack (JOB END) when 0: Disable 1: Enable printing multiple collated copies. This bit switch determines the timing of the PJL USTATUS JOB END sent when multiple collated copies are being printed.
  • Page 595 Main SP Tables-9 1001 Bit Switch 010 Bit Switch 10 bit 0 to 3 bit 4 Not Used bit 5 Auto Job Promotion locks the queue 0: Queue is 1: Queue not locked locked after after AJP If this is 1, then after a job is stored using Auto Job Promotion, new jobs cannot be added to the queue until the stored job has been completely printed.
  • Page 596 5. System Maintenance Tone (Factory) 1101-001 Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be either a) the factory setting, b) the previous setting, or c) the current setting. [Resolution Settings] Sets the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment. The asterisk (*) shows which mode is set.

  • Page 597: Scanner Service Mode

    Main SP Tables-9 1104-003 Black: Middle 1104-023 Cyan: Middle [0 to 30 / 0 / 1/step] 1104-043 Magenta: Middle 1104-063 Yellow: Middle 1104-004 Black: IDmax 1104-024 Cyan: IDmax [0 to 30 / 0 / 1/step] 1104-044 Magenta: IDmax 1104-064 Yellow: IDmax [Save Tone Cntrol Value] Saves the print gamma (adjusted with the Gamma Adj.) as the new Current Setting.
  • Page 598 5. System Maintenance *CTL Operates automatic initialization to ensure that scanner NV is initialized if necessary. To do this SP, specify the version of scanner NV within 9 characters. 1001-005 “Function name”_”Machine code”_”Serial number” - Function name: Enter “3”. - Machine code: Enter the machine code with three characters. - Serial number: Enter the number (default: 001).

  • Page 599: Sp2-Xxx (Scanning-Image Quality)

    Main SP Tables-9 0:No 1:Yes *CTL [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] Set if the following user information is released or not. - Destination of the mail, folder, CS 1012-001 - Sender - Message - Subject - Fail name 1013 [Scan to Media Device Setting] 0:OFF 1:ON...

  • Page 600: Test Pattern Printing

    5. System Maintenance [Compression ratio of ClearLightPDF] 2024 Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can be selected at the operation panel. 2024-001 Compression Ratio(Normal) [5 to 95 / 25 / 1 /step ] *CTL 2024-002 Compression Ratio(High) [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ] [Compression ratio of ClearLightPDF JPEG2000]...
  • Page 601 Main SP Tables-9 • If you want to use black and white printing, touch "Black & White" on the LCD. If you want to use color printing, touch "Full Colour" on the LCD. 7. Press the "Start" key to start the test print. 8.

  • Page 602: Firmware Update

    5. System Maintenance Firmware Update To update the firmware for this machine, you must have the new version of the firmware downloaded onto an SD (Secure Digital) Card. The SD Card is inserted into SD Card Slot 2 on the left rear side of the controller box.

  • Page 603: Before You Begin

    Firmware Update Flash ROM on the PictBridge PictBridge control PictBridge controller board Flash ROM on the MediaPrint:JPEG/ MediaPrint:JPEG/TIFF MediaPrint control controller board TIFF Flash ROM on the Summary Font Summary fonts FONT controller board Flash ROM on the PCL Font PCL fonts FONT1 controller board...

  • Page 604: Updating Firmware

    5. System Maintenance • Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SD card. • Keep SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed to high temperature, high humidity, or exposure to direct sunlight. •...
  • Page 605 Firmware Update 2. Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 1). 3. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 2 (lower). Make sure the label on the SD card faces the rear side of the machine.

  • Page 606: Error Messages

    5. System Maintenance 4. Slowly push the SD card into the slot so it locks in place. You will hear it click. Make sure the SD card locks in place. • To remove the SD, push it in to unlock the spring lock. Then release it so it pops out of the slot. 5.

  • Page 607: Firmware Update Error

    Firmware Update Firmware Update Error If a firmware update error occurs, this means the update was cancelled during the update because the module selected for update was not on the SD card. Recovery after Power Loss If the ROM update is interrupted as a result of accidental loss of power while the firmware is updating, then the correct operation of the machine cannot be guaranteed after the machine is switched on again.

  • Page 608: Browser Unit Update Procedure

    5. System Maintenance Browser Unit Update Procedure 1. Remove the slot cover [A] for the SD card ( x 1).

  • Page 609: Handling Firmware Update Errors

    Firmware Update 2. Turn the SD-card label face [A] of the browser unit to the rear of the machine. Then push it slowly into slot 2 (lower) until you hear a click. 3. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. 4.
  • Page 610 5. System Maintenance Error occurred when ROM Controller program abnormal. If the second attempt update program started fails, replace controller board. Make sure SD card inserted correctly, or use another SD card access error SD card. No HDD available for stamp HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.

  • Page 611: Reboot/System Setting Reset

    Reboot/System Setting Reset Reboot/System Setting Reset Software Reset You can reboot the software with one of the following two procedures: 1. Turn the main power switch off and on. 2. Press and hold down together for over 10 seconds. When the machine beeps once, release both buttons.

  • Page 612: Copier Setting Reset

    5. System Maintenance Copier Setting Reset Use the following procedure to reset the copy settings in the UP mode to their defaults. 1. Press User Tools/Counter 2. Hold down and then press Copier/Document Server Settings. • You must press first. 3.

  • Page 613: Controller Self-Diagnostics

    Controller Self-Diagnostics Controller Self-Diagnostics Overview There are three types of self-diagnostics for the controller. 1. Power-on self-diagnostics: The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics just after the power has been turned on. 2. SC detection: The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power-on or during operation. The following shows the workflow of the power-on and detailed self-diagnostics.
  • Page 614 5. System Maintenance...

  • Page 615: Downloading Stamp Data

    Downloading Stamp Data Downloading Stamp Data The stamp data should be downloaded from the controller firmware to the hard disks at the following times: • After the hard disks have been replaced. The print data contains the controller software. Execute SP 5853 to download the fixed stamp data required by the hard disks.

  • Page 616: Nvram Data Upload/Download

    5. System Maintenance NVRAM Data Upload/Download Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card. • This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced. •...
  • Page 617 NVRAM Data Upload/Download 2. Remove the SD slot cover ( x 1). 3. Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into SD Card Slot 2 (lower). 4. Switch the copier main power switch on. 5. Do SP5825-001 (NVRAM Data Download) and press the "Execute" key. •...

  • Page 618: Address Book Upload/Download

    5. System Maintenance Address Book Upload/Download Information List The following information is possible to be uploaded and downloaded. Information • Registration No. • Select Title • User Code • Folder • E-mail • Local Authentication • Protection Code • Folder Authentication •...

  • Page 619: Upload

    Address Book Upload/Download Upload 1. Turn off the main power switch of the main machine. 2. Remove the SD slot cover at the left rear side of the machine ( x 1). 3. Install the SD card, which has already been uploaded, into the SD card slot 2 (lower). 4.

  • Page 620: Using The Debug Log

    5. System Maintenance Using the Debug Log Overview This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis. Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory. But this information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.
  • Page 621 Using the Debug Log • The default setting is "0" (OFF). This feature must be switched on in order for the debug information to be saved. 4. Select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under "5857 Save Debug Log", touch "2 Target", enter "2"...
  • Page 622 5. System Maintenance Example 2: To Specify an SC Code Touch "3 Any SC Error", enter the 3-digit SC code number with the control panel number keys. Then press . This example shows an entry for SC670. • For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in Section 4. "Troubleshooting".
  • Page 623 Using the Debug Log The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers (The initials in parentheses indicate the names of the modules). 4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10 Key No. Copy Printer Scanner 2222 (SCS) 14000 (SRM) 256 (IMH) 1000 (ECS) 1025 (MCS)

  • Page 624: Retrieving The Debug Log From The Hdd

    SD card. 3. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh representative by email. You can also send the SD card by regular mail if you want.

  • Page 625: Debug Log Codes

    Using the Debug Log Debug Log Codes SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operation is executed in the log directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot.

  • Page 626: Card Save Function

    5. System Maintenance Card Save Function Overview Card Save: • The Card Save function is used to save print jobs received by the printer on an SD card with no print output. Card Save mode is toggled using printer Bit Switch #1 bit number 4. Card Save will remain enabled until the SD card becomes full, or until all file names have been used.
  • Page 627 Card Save Function 6. Select "Bit Switch 1 Settings" and use the numeric keypad to turn bit 4 ON and then press the "#" button to register the change. The result should look like: 00010000. By doing this, Card Save option will appear in the "List/Test Print"...
  • Page 628 5. System Maintenance 10. Card Save (Add) and Card Save (New) should be displayed on the screen. Select Card Save (Add) or Card Save (New). 11. Press "OK" and then exit the "User Tools/Counter" menu. 12. Press the "Printer" button. 13.

  • Page 629: Error Messages

    Card Save Function 15. As soon as the printer receives the data, it will be stored on the SD card automatically with no print output. Nothing is displayed on the screen, indicating that a Card Save operation was successful. 16. Press "Offline" and then the "Clear/Stop" button to exit Card Save mode. 17.

  • Page 630: Smc List Card Save Function

    5. System Maintenance SMC List Card Save Function Overview SMC List Card Save • The SMC List Card Save (SP Text Mode) function is used to save the SMC list as CSV files to the SD-card inserted into the operation panel SD-card slot. Procedure 1.
  • Page 631 SMC List Card Save Function Detail No. SMC Categories to Save 005 Diagnostic Report 006 Non-Default 007 NIB Summary 008 Capture Log 021 Copier User Program 022 Scanner SP 023 Scanner User Program 024 SDK/J Summary 025 SDK/J Application Info 026 Printer SP 7.

  • Page 632: File Names Of The Saved Smc Lists

    5. System Maintenance 9. “It is executing it” is shown on the screen while executing. 10. Wait for 2 to 3 minutes until “Completed” is shown. • The SMC list saving may take from 2 to 3 minutes to complete. •...

  • Page 633: Error Messages

    SMC List Card Save Function File creation date Year/Month/Day (“Zero” will be omitted if each is one digit.) File creation time Hour/Minute/Second (“Zero” will be omitted if each is one digit.) File Extension CSV (Comma Separated Value) This part is fixed. •...
  • Page 634 5. System Maintenance...

  • Page 635: Troubleshooting

    6. Troubleshooting SC Tables Service Call Conditions Summary The ‘SC Table’ section shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter (not controller errors) are put into four types. The type is determined by their reset procedures. The table shows the classification of the SC codes.

  • Page 636: Sc Code Classification

    6. Troubleshooting • If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards, first disconnect then reconnect the connectors before you replace the PCBs. • If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load before you replace motors or sensors. SC Code Classification The table shows the classification of the SC codes: Class 1...
  • Page 637 SC Tables Class 1 Section SC Code Detailed section 500 - Paper feed 515 - Duplex 520 - Paper transport Paper feed and Fusing 530 - Fan motor 540 - Fusing 560 - Others 570 - Unique for a specific model 600 - Electrical counters 620 -...

  • Page 638: Sc1Xx: Scanning

    6. Troubleshooting SC1xx: Scanning Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Exposure lamp error The peak white level is less than 64/255 digits (8 bits) when scanning the shading plate. • Exposure lamp defective • Lamp stabilizer defective • Exposure lamp connector defective •...
  • Page 639 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Scanner home position error 2 The scanner home position sensor does not detect the "ON" condition during operation. • Scanner motor driver defective • Scanner motor defective • Harness between SBU and scanner motor disconnected •...
  • Page 640 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) White level detection error The white level cannot be adjusted within the target during auto gain control. • Dirty exposure glass or optics section • SBU defective • Exposure lamp defective •...
  • Page 641 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) BICU error: abnormal LSYNC The error result of the self-diagnostic by the ASIC on the BICU is detected at power on or recovery from the energy save mode. • Defective BICU •...

  • Page 642: Sc 2Xx: Exposure

    6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Serial Number Mismatch Serial number stored in the memory does not have the correct code. • EEPROM defective • BICU replaced without original EEPROM 1. Check the serial number with SP5-811-002. 2.
  • Page 643 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The polygon mirror motor does not leave the READY status within the given time after the polygon motor switches off. • Disconnected or defective harness to polygon motor driver board • Defective polygon motor driver board •...
  • Page 644 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the LDB is not output for the prescribed time after the LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is rotating normally •...
  • Page 645 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) FGATE OFF error: Cy FGATE OFF error: Ma FGATE OFF error: Ye • The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after processing finish timing for black (-01), cyan (-02), magenta (-03) or yellow (-04) color writing.

  • Page 646: Sc3Xx: Image Processing - 1

    6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The temperature thermistor output is no more than 0.81 V or no less than 2.95 V. • No thermistor is installed or disconnected connectors • Defective thermistor 1. Check the connection of the connectors. 2.

  • Page 647: Sc3Xx: Image Processing - 2

    SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The feedback voltage of the charge AC for each color is 0.3 V or less for 0.2 seconds after the charge AC has turned on. • Disconnected or broken harnesses of the HVPS •...
  • Page 648 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: Ma The Vt value of the magenta TD sensor exceeds the specified value (SP3030-033) 0.2 V for three consecutive times. TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: Ye The Vt value of the yellow TD sensor exceeds the specified value (SP3030-034) 0.2 V for three consecutive times.
  • Page 649 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) TD sensor (Vt) upper limit error 1: Ye The Vt value upper limit of the yellow TD sensor (SP3210-004) exceeds the specified value (SP3211-002) for the specified number of times (SP3211-003) consecutively.
  • Page 650 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Black, cyan, magenta, or yellow TD sensor disconnected • Harness between TD sensor and PCDU defective • Defective TD sensor 1. Check the black, cyan, magenta, or yellow TD sensor connector and harness between the TD sensor and PCDU.
  • Page 651 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) TD sensor adjustment error: Ye During TD sensor initialization, the output value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor is not within the range of the value specified with SP3238-001 to -004 (default: 2.5V) 0.2 V.

  • Page 652: Sc4Xx: Image Processing - 2

    6. Troubleshooting SC4xx: Image Processing - 2 Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Image transfer belt contact motor error The image transfer belt contact motor drives beyond the specified time during home position detection or contact operation. • Broken harness or defective connectors •...
  • Page 653 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Separation power pack output error An interrupt checks the status of the power pack every 20 ms. This SC is issued if the BICU detects a short in the power pack 10 times at D(ac). •...
  • Page 654 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) High voltage power: Image transfer/ paper transfer bias output error An error signal is detected for 200 ms when charging the separation, image transfer belt or paper transfer roller. • High voltage leak •...

  • Page 655: Sc5Xx: Paper Feed And Fusing

    SC Tables SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) 1st paper tray lift motor malfunction 2nd paper tray lift motor malfunction (optional paper feed unit) 3rd paper tray lift motor malfunction (optional paper feed unit) The paper lift sensor does not detect paper or finish the detection within the specified time, after the tray lift motor switched on.
  • Page 656 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Transport motor error The machine detects a High signal from a transport motor lock detection for 2 seconds after the transport motor turned on. • Unit overload • Defective motor 1. Replace the unit. 2.
  • Page 657 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) PSU fan motor error The motor lock signal error is detected 50 consecutive times (5 seconds) after the motor lock signal was first detected. • Defective fan motor • Disconnected or defective harness •...
  • Page 658 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller thermopile error The temperature detected by the heating roller thermopile does not reach 0°C within the prescribed time for 10 consecutive times. • Loose connection of the heating roller thermopile •...
  • Page 659 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller thermopile overheat (software error) The temperature detected by the heating roller thermopile stays at the prescribed temperature within the prescribed time. • Defective PSU • Defective BICU 1. Replace the PSU. 2.
  • Page 660 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Zero cross error: fusing lamp relay contact welding • The zero cross signal is detected three times even though the heater relay is off when turning on the main power. • The zero cross signal is not detected for 2 seconds even though the heater relay is on after turning on the main power or closing the front door.
  • Page 661 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Zero cross error: low frequencies error • The zero cross signal is detected three times even though the heater relay is off when turning on the main power. • The zero cross signal is not detected for 2 seconds even though the heater relay is on after turning on the main power or closing the front door.
  • Page 662 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller warm-up error (sensor 2) • The heating roller temperature does not reach 80°C within the prescribed time. • The center temperature of the heating roller does not reach the target reload permit temperature within the prescribed time.
  • Page 663 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Consecutive fusing jam The paper jam counter for the fusing unit reaches three consecutive times (the fusing exit sensor does not detect the paper). • Paper jam in the fusing unit. Remove the paper that is jammed in the fusing unit.
  • Page 664 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Pressure roller overheat (software error): Center The temperature detected by the pressure roller thermistor stays at the prescribed temperature within the prescribed time. • Defective PSU • Defective BICU 1. Replace the PSU. 2.
  • Page 665 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller warm-up error (sensor 4) The temperature of the heating roller does not reach 20 °C within the prescribed time. • Dirty thermopile lenses • Defective heating roller thermistor • Input voltage out of the warranty (out of specification) 1.

  • Page 666: Sc6Xx: Communication

    6. Troubleshooting SC6xx: Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Mechanical counter error: Bk This SC is only for NA models. The machine detects the mechanical counter error when SP5987-001 is set to "1". • Disconnected mechanical counter • Defective mechanical counter 1.
  • Page 667 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) 2nd Paper Bank communication error This SC is not issued for this machine. When a communication error signal between the 1st paper bank and 2nd paper bank is received. • Loose or disconnected connector 1.
  • Page 668 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Counter device error 3 A backup RAM error was returned by the counter device. • Counter device control board defective • Backup battery of counter device defective 1. Replace the counter device. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Counter device error 4...
  • Page 669 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Expanded authentication module error There is no expanded authentication module in the machine. The SD card or the file of the expanded authentication module is broken. • No expanded authentication module •...
  • Page 670 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Tracking information notice error Tracking application error Tracking information is lost. • The machine failed to give notice of the tracking information to the tracking SDK application. • Tracking information is lost, and the machine cannot count correctly. 1.
  • Page 671 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Communication error: Engine Controller (No response) No response from engine to frame after frame sending from controller with RAPI protocol. (No response after 3 attempts of sending every 100 ms) Asserts the error detected by the serial driver from PSC module to SRM with RAPI command.
  • Page 672 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Engine start up error The BICU fails to respond within the prescribed time when the machine is turned • Connections between BICU and controller board are loose, disconnected, or damaged. 1. Replace the BICU. 2.
  • Page 673 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Toner bottle ID: Communication error • Communication error occurs when the toner bottle ID starts to communicate with the toner bottle ID receptor. • Retry of toner bottle ID communication fails three times after the machine has detected the toner bottle ID communication error.

  • Page 674: Sc7Xx: Peripherals

    6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Memory address (PER) command error The BICU does not receive a memory address command from the controller 120 seconds after paper is in the position for registration. • Loose connection • Defective controller •...
  • Page 675 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) sysarch (LPUX_ENGINE_TIMERCTRL) error sysarch (LPUX_RETURN_FACTOR_STR) error sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error to -12 read () error Sub-system error to -94 Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Fatal kernel error [XXXX]: Detailed error code Due to a control error, a RAM overflow occurred during system processing.
  • Page 676 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Others "init died", "vm_pageout: VM is full", "Cache Error” Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Self-diagnostics error: CPU [XXXX]: Detailed error code CPU error During the self-diagnostic, the controller CPU detects an error. There are 47 types of error code (0001 to 4005) depending on the cause of the error.
  • Page 677 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Self-diagnostics error: CPU [XXXX]: Detailed error code ASIC error The write-&-verify check error has occurred in the ASIC. [0B00] • Defective ASIC device 1. Replace the controller board. CPU/Memory Error • System firmware problem •...
  • Page 678 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Check performed only when HDD is installed: • HDD device busy for over 31 s. • After a diagnostic command is set for the HDD, but the device remains busy for over 6 s. [3003] •...
  • Page 679 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Self-diagnostic error : NVRAM NVRAM device does not exist, NVRAM device is damaged, or NVRAM socket damaged. [1401] • NVRAM defective • Controller board defective • NVRAM backup battery exhausted • NVRAM socket damaged Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Self-diagnostic error: Standard SDRAM DIMM...
  • Page 680 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Check sum error 1 The boot monitor and OS program stored in the ROM DIMM is checked. If the [0101] check sum of the program is incorrect, this SC code is displayed. 1.
  • Page 681 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) A verify error occurred when setting data was read from the clock generator via the I2C bus. • Defective clock generator [2701] • Defective I2C bus • Defective I2C port on the CPU 1.
  • Page 682 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) EEPROM error 2: EEPROM read/write error Mirrored data of the EEPROM is different from the original data in EEPROM. Data in the EEPROM is overwritten for some reason. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Flash ROM verification error Verification error of the flash ROM on the controller board occurs.
  • Page 683 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Hardware Problem:wireless LAN board The wireless LAN board can be accessed, but an error was detected. • Loose connection • Defective wireless LAN card 1. Make sure that the Wireless LAN is connected. 2.
  • Page 684 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Other error: A serious error occurs while the data is encrypted. • Same as SC991 Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD Encryption unit error 2 A serious error occurs when the HDD data is encrypted to update an encryption key with the HDD encryption unit.
  • Page 685 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD startup error at main power on HDD is connected but a driver error is detected. The driver does not respond to the HDD within 30 s. • HDD is not initialized •...
  • Page 686 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The error occurred at an area which does not belong to a partition. The error occurred at partition a. The error occurred at partition b. The error occurred at partition c. The error occurred at partition d.
  • Page 687 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD: CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD cannot respond to a CRC error query. Data transfer does not execute normally while data is being written to the HDD. Note: -01 to -23 indicate the type of partition where the error occurred. Enable display of these numbers with SP7902.
  • Page 688 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The error occurred at partition q. The error occurred at partition r. The error occurred at partition s. The error occurred at partition t. The error occurred at partition u. The error occurred at partition v. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD: Access error...
  • Page 689 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The error occurred at partition j. The error occurred at partition k. The error occurred at partition l. The error occurred at partition m. The error occurred at partition n. The error occurred at partition o. The error occurred at partition p.
  • Page 690 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SD card error: SD card removed The SD card is ejected from the slot while the machine is on. 1. Insert the SD card, then turn the machine off and on. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SD card error: SD card access...
  • Page 691 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Address book error The address book data cannot be read from the HDD, SD card or flash ROM on the controller where it is stored, or the data read from the media is defective. •...
  • Page 692 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD mail send data error An error is detected on the HDD immediately after the machine has been turned on, or power has been turned off while the machine has used the HDD. •...
  • Page 693 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Ending with stop direction Library abnormal recovery to -65 Not available Unfinished erase HDD format failure (at normal) HDD format failure (at abnormal) Library incorrect recovery Other error Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Delete All error 1: HDD A data error is detected for the HDD/NVRAM after the Delete All option has been used.
  • Page 694 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Log Data Error 1 • Damaged log data file in the HDD 1. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004. Log Data Error 2 • An encryption module not installed 1. Disable the log encryption setting with SP9730-004 ("0" is off.) Log Data Error 3 •...
  • Page 695 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SD card error The 'all delete' function cannot be executed but DataOverwriteSecurity Unit is installed and activated. • Defective SD card • SD card not installed 1. Replace the NVRAM and then install the new SD card. 2.
  • Page 696 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) TCSD Error An error occurred in TPM software stack. • TPM defective 1. Replace the controller board. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) File format converter (MLB) error A request to get access to the MLB is not answered within the specified time (60 seconds).

  • Page 697: Sc9Xx: Others

    SC Tables SC9xx: Others Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Printer error No response at PM start up Timeout error during the PM operation Working memory error Cannot start-up the filtering process Abnormal exit from the filtering process An error is detected in the printer application program. •...
  • Page 698 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Net File function error The NetFile file management on the HDD cannot be used, or a NetFile management file is corrupted and operation cannot continue. The HDD is defective and it cannot be debugged or partitioned, so the Scan Router functions (delivery of received faxes, document capture, etc.), Web services, and other network functions cannot be used.
  • Page 699 SC Tables Procedure 1 If the machine shows SC codes for HDD errors (SC860 to SC865) with SC 925, do the recovery procedures for SC860 to SC865. Procedure 2 If the machine does not show one of the five HDD errors (SC860 to SC865), turn the machine power off and on.
  • Page 700 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Software error 2 The software performs an unexpected function. However, unlike SC990, recovery processing allows the program to continue. • Software defective, re-boot In order to get more details about SC990 and SC991: 1) Execute SP7403 or print an SMC Report (SP5990) to read the history of the 10 most recent logged errors.
  • Page 701 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Software Error 3: Cannot select application function An application does not start after the user pushed the correct key on the operation panel. • Software bug • A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the application is not installed or not installed correctly.

  • Page 702: Process Control Error Conditions

    6. Troubleshooting Process Control Error Conditions Developer Initialization Result SP-3-014-001 (Developer Initialization Result) Result Description Possible Causes/Action Successfully Developer initialization is completed successfully completed. • A cover was opened or the main switch was turned off during the initialization. 1. Do the developer initialization again when Forced Developer initialization done in SP mode.

  • Page 703: Process Control Self-Check Result

    Process Control Error Conditions • The machine starts developer initialization after you set "Enable" in SP3-902-005, 006, 007, or 008. Developer initialization automatically resumes when you open and close the front door or turn the main switch off and on if an error other than Error 8 occurs. Process Control Self-Check Result Displayed number shows results of each color sensor check.
  • Page 704 6. Troubleshooting No. Result Description Possible Causes/Action When the K5 is more ID sensor than the value of • ID sensor pattern density is too high or low. coefficient (K5) SP3-362-003 or less • ID sensor or shutter is defective. maximum/ than the value of Same as 53...

  • Page 705: Vsg Adjustment Result

    Process Control Error Conditions Vsg Adjustment Result SP3-323-001 to -010 (Vsg Adjustment Result) No. Result Description Possible Causes/Action Vsg adjustment is correctly done. • Dirty ID sensor (toner, dust, or foreign material) • Dirty transfer belt • Scratched image transfer belt •...
  • Page 706 6. Troubleshooting Result Description Note Not done Line position adjustment has not been done. Completed Line position adjustment has correctly been done, successfully Cannot detect ID sensors have not detected the patterns for line See Note patterns position adjustment. Fewer lines on the The patterns, which ID sensors have detected, are not pattern than the See Note...

  • Page 707: Troubleshooting Guide

    Troubleshooting Guide Troubleshooting Guide Line Position Adjustment When there are color registration errors on the output, do the line position adjustment as follows. Test 1. Do SP2-111-003 (Mode c: rough adjustment). 2. Use SP2-194-007 to check if the result of the line position adjustment is correct (0: Completed successfully, 1: Not completed).
  • Page 708 6. Troubleshooting Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure • Defective image processing unit • Low density of test pattern • Defective BICU White image, Abnormal image, Low 1. Replace the high voltage power supply unit. density 2. Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or supply some toner (SP3-030-xxx).
  • Page 709 Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure • Defective ID sensor at center • Deformed center area on the image transfer belt The main scan registration is shifted • Defective BICU by more than ±0.66 mm, but only at the central area of the image on the 1.
  • Page 710 6. Troubleshooting Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure White image, Abnormal image, • Defective laser optics housing unit shutter Low density • Defective image processing unit • Low density of test pattern • Defective BICU 1. Replace the shutter motor. 2. Replace the high voltage power supply unit. 3.
  • Page 711 Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure The sub scan registrations of M, C, Y • No defective component are shifted by more than ±1.4mm • Defective image transfer belt from the sub scan registration of K. • Defective drive units •...
  • Page 712 6. Troubleshooting Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure Low image density on the output • Low pattern density Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or supply some toner (SP3-030-xxx). The main scan registration is shifted, • Defective ID sensor at center but only at the central area of the •...

  • Page 713: Problem At Regular Intervals

    Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure The skew of M, C, Y, K is different. • Defective PCDU • Defective laser optics housing unit • Defective BICU 1. Reinstall or replace the PCDU. 2. Perform the color skew adjustment ( p.159).

  • Page 714: Blank Print

    6. Troubleshooting • Abnormal image at 55.4 (center) or 55.0 (end)-mm intervals: Paper transfer roller • Colored spots at 75.4-mm intervals: OPC drum • Spots at 78.5-mm intervals: Pressure roller • Spots at 78.5-mm intervals: Fusing belt Blank Print Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions Defective laser unit...

  • Page 715: Missing Cmy Color

    Troubleshooting Guide Missing CMY Color Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU. Loose connection between Replace the drum positioning printer cartridge and BICU cover. C, M, or Y is missing. Image transfer belt not Check the belt tension unit. contacting PCDU Defective the drum motor: CMY Replace the drum motor: CMY.

  • Page 716: Dark Vertical Line On Prints

    6. Troubleshooting Interval Possible cause Necessary actions At intervals of 33.6 mm (1.32 Defective charge roller Replace the PCDU. inches) At intervals of 20.9 mm (0.82 Defective development roller Replace the PCDU. inches) At intervals from 55.0 (end) to Replace the paper transfer 55.4 (center) mm (from 2.16 to Defective paper transfer roller roller unit.

  • Page 717: White Horizontal Lines Or Bands

    Troubleshooting Guide White Horizontal Lines or Bands Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU. Defective image transfer belt Replace the image transfer belt White lines or bands appear in unit unit. images of all toner colors. Replace the paper transfer Defective paper transfer roller roller.

  • Page 718: Partial Cmy Color Dots

    6. Troubleshooting Partial CMY Color Dots Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU. Unexpected dots of the same Defective image transfer belt Replace the image transfer belt color appear at irregular unit unit. intervals. Defective fusing unit Replace the fusing unit.

  • Page 719: Unfused Or Partially Fused Prints

    Troubleshooting Guide Unfused or Partially Fused Prints Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions Non-standard paper in use Use recommended paper. Some parts of images are not Select an appropriate media Incorrect media type mode fused very well. mode. Defective fusing unit Replace the fusing unit.

  • Page 720: Background Stain

    6. Troubleshooting Background Stain Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions Unclean paper transfer roller Clean the paper transfer roller. Unclean paper path Clean the paper path. The reverse side of the paper is not clean. Unclean registration roller Clean the registration roller. Defective fusing unit Replace the fusing unit.

  • Page 721: Jam Detection

    Jam Detection Jam Detection Paper Jam Display SP7-507 shows the paper jam history. • CODE: Indicates the jam code. • SIZE: Indicates the paper Size Code. • TOTAL: Indicates the total counter (SP7-502-001). • DATE: indicates the date when the jam occurred. Jam Codes and Display Codes SP7-504 shows how many jams occurred at each location.
  • Page 722 6. Troubleshooting Jam Code Display Description Display 7504 9 Duplex: ON Paper is jammed at the duplex unit. Vertical transport sensor 2 does not detect 7504 12 Bank Transport 1: ON paper from tray 2. Registration sensor does not detect paper and 7504 17 Registration: ON (Tray) paper feed exit sensor turns on.

  • Page 723: Paper Size Code

    Jam Detection Jam Code Display Description Display The ARDF original transport motor is 7505 100 ARDF transport motor abnormal. Paper Size Code Size Code Paper Size Size Code Paper Size A4 LEF B4 SEF A5 LEF B5 SEF B5 LEF DLT SEF LT LEF LG SEF...

  • Page 724: Electrical Component Defects

    6. Troubleshooting Electrical Component Defects Sensors Sensor Name/ CN No./ Active Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Pin No. Open By-pass Bottom Plate CN523/24 • SC508 HP Sensor Shorted • Paper is detected on the by-pass tray Open when no paper is set.
  • Page 725 Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ CN No./ Active Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Pin No. Open Fusing Thermopile CN525/13 Shorted Open HST Sensor (K) CN539/14 Shorted Open • PCU setting Error HST Sensor (C) CN539/15 occurs. Shorted Open HST Sensor (M) CN539/16 Shorted Open...
  • Page 726 6. Troubleshooting Sensor Name/ CN No./ Active Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Pin No. Open PTR Contact Sensor CN523/5 • SC452 Shorted Open • Jam A (Jam 17) Registration Sensor CN559/17 Shorted • Jam B Open Scanner HP Sensor CN104/5 SC120, SC121 Shorted Open...
  • Page 727 Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ CN No./ Active Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Pin No. Open • Jam C (Jam 20) Paper Exit CN525/7 Shorted • Jam C (Jam 60) Open Pressure Roller CN568/4 • SC551 Thermistor (End) Shorted Open Pressure Roller CN568/2 •...

  • Page 728: Blown Fuse Conditions

    6. Troubleshooting Blown Fuse Conditions Power Supply Unit Rating Fuse Symptom when turning on the main switch 120V-127V 220V-240V 10A/250V 10A/250V • 24V power to the BICU not supplied. 10A/250V 10A/250V • 24V power to the BICU not supplied. • 5V power to the BICU not supplied. 5A/250V 5A/250V •...

  • Page 729: Scanner Test Mode

    Scanner Test Mode Scanner Test Mode SBU Test Mode Output the SBU test pattern with SP4-807-001 to make sure the scanner SBU control operates correctly. The SBU test pattern prints out after you have set the SP mode settings and pressed the start key. •...

  • Page 730: Energy Save

    6. Troubleshooting Energy Save Energy Saver Modes Customers should use energy saver modes properly, to save energy and protect the environment. The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when the timers are at the default settings.

  • Page 731: Recommendation

    Energy Save Recommendation We recommend that the default settings should be kept. • If the customer requests that these settings should be changed, please explain that their energy costs could increase, and that they should consider the effects on the environment of extra energy use.
  • Page 732 6. Troubleshooting Machine SP8941: Time at Time at End Running Power Power Start (min.) (min.) time consumption consumption Condition Machine (hour) Spec. (W) (KWH) Status ( x )/1000 )/60 = Operating 001: Operatin g Time 21089.0 21386.0 4.95 4.45 Stand by 002: Standby (Ready)

  • Page 733: Paper Save

    Paper Save Paper Save Effectiveness of Duplex/Combine Function Duplexing and the combine functions reduce the amount of paper used. This means that less energy overall is used for paper production, which improves the environment. 1. Duplex: Reduce paper volume in half! 2.
  • Page 734 6. Troubleshooting To check the paper consumption, look at the total counter and the duplex counter. The total counter counts all pages printed. • For one duplex page, the total counter goes up by 2. • For a duplex job of a three-page original, the total counter goes up by 3. The duplex counter counts pages that have images on both sides.
  • Page 735 Model GR-C1 Machine Codes: D117/D118 Appendices 28 Dec, 2011...
  • Page 737 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. Appendices Specifications..............................3 Specifications..............................3 Mainframe..............................3 Printer..............................4 Scanner..............................5 ARDF...............................6 Supported Paper Sizes............................7 Software Accessories............................9 Printer Drivers..............................9 Optional Equipment............................10 Paper Feed Unit (D573)..........................10 1-bin Tray Unit (D574)..........................10 Utility Software.............................10 2. Preventive Maintenance Tables Maintenance Tables............................13 Preventive Maintenance Items........................13 Yield Parts............................13 Mainframe............................13 Other Yield Parts............................15 One-tray Paper Feed Unit (D573)....................15...
  • Page 738 Main SP Tables-6............................340 SP6-XXX (Peripherals)..........................340 Main SP Tables-7............................342 SP7-XXX (Data Log)..........................342 Main SP Tables-8............................382 SP8-XXX (Data Log2)..........................382 Input and Output Check..........................433 Input Check Table.............................433 Printer..............................433 Table 1: Paper Size Switch (Tray 1)....................436 Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2)....................437 Table 3: Paper Size Switch (Tray 3 and 4)..................437 ARDF..............................438 Internal Finisher..........................438 Output Check Table..........................439...

  • Page 739: Appendices

    1. Appendices Specifications Specifications Mainframe Configuration: Desktop Laser beam scanning and electro-photographic printing Print Process: 4 drums tandem method Copy Speed: 30 cpm (A4/LT) Color: 11 seconds or less (A4, LT, SEF) First Copy Time: Black and White: 7 seconds or less (A4, LT, SEF) Warm-up Time: 30 seconds or less Standard tray: 250 sheets...

  • Page 740: Printer

    1. Appendices Output Paper Capacity: Basic model: Up to 500 sheets (A4/ LT/ 80 g/m / 20 lb) Memory: Standard: 1 GB 110 V, 60 Hz: More than 10 A (for Taiwan) Power Source: 120V -127 V, 60 Hz: More than 10 A (for North America) 220 V - 240 V, 50/60 Hz: More than 5 A (for Europe/Asia) 110 V: 1300 W or less 120 V: 1300 W or less...

  • Page 741: Scanner

    Specifications PCL5c/ 6: 45 fonts Resident Fonts: 13 International fonts Adobe PostScript 3: 136 fonts Ethernet (100 Base-TX/ 10 Base-T): Standard USB2.0 (Type A/ B): Standard SD slot (Operation panel): Standard Host Interfaces: IEEE802.11a/g (Wireless LAN): Optional IEEE1284 ECP: Optional Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Base-T): Optional Bluetooth V2+EDR: Optional Network Protocols:...

  • Page 742: Ardf

    1. Appendices ARDF Size A4 to A5, LG to HLT Simplex Weight 52 to 128 g/m (14 to 34 lb.) Paper Size/Weight: Size A4 to A5, LG to HLT Duplex Weight 60 to 105 g/m (17 to 28 lb.) Table Capacity: 50 sheets (80 g/m , 20 lb.) Separation:...

  • Page 743: Supported Paper Sizes

    Supported Paper Sizes Supported Paper Sizes Main Tray By-pass Tray Paper Size (W x L) Duplex A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm Letter SEF...
  • Page 744 1. Appendices Main Tray By-pass Tray Paper Size (W x L) Duplex C5 Env. 162 x 229 mm DL Env. 110 x 220 mm Y: Supported: the sensor detects the paper size. Y#: Supported: the user specifies the paper size. N: Not supported •...

  • Page 745: Software Accessories

    Software Accessories Software Accessories The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run installer allows you to select which components to install. Printer Drivers Printer Language Windows XP Vista/7 Macintosh PCL 5c/6 Printer Language Windows Server2003/2008 or later PCL 5c/6 •...

  • Page 746: Optional Equipment

    1. Appendices Optional Equipment Paper Feed Unit (D573) Paper Feed System: Paper Height Detection: Empty only Capacity: 500 sheets Paper Weight: 60 to 163 g/m (16 to 43.5 lb.) Paper Size: A5/HLT to A4/LG SEF Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the main frame) Power Consumption: Less than 27 W Dimensions (W x D x H):...
  • Page 747 Optional Equipment Smart Device Monitor for A printer management utility for administrator. Admin DeskTopBinder itself can be used as personal document DeskTopBinder Lite Ver.5, management software and can manage both image data Professional Ver.5 converted from paper documents and application files saves in each client's PC.
  • Page 748 1. Appendices...

  • Page 749: Preventive Maintenance Tables

    2. Preventive Maintenance Tables Maintenance Tables Preventive Maintenance Items Yield Parts The parts mentioned in these tables have a target yield. However, the total copy/print volume made by the machine will not reach the target yield within the machine's targeted lifetime if the machine is used under the target usage conditions (ACV, color ratio, P/J, and C/O).
  • Page 750 2. Preventive Maintenance Tables Item 120K 240K Remarks Fusing Fusing Unit Paper Path Registration Roller Damp cloth Blower brush or Registration Sensor dry cloth Inverter Roller Damp cloth Blower brush or Paper Dust Case dry cloth By-pass Feed Roller Damp cloth Duplex Rollers Damp cloth Blower brush or...

  • Page 751: Other Yield Parts

    Maintenance Tables Item 120K 240K Remarks Waste Toner Bottle Dust Filter Exhaust Filter Other Yield Parts The parts mentioned in these tables have a target yield. However, the total copy/print volume made by the machine will not reach the target yield within the machine's targeted lifetime if the machine is used under the target usage conditions (ACV, color ratio, P/J, and C/O).
  • Page 752 2. Preventive Maintenance Tables...

  • Page 753: Sp Mode Tables

    3. SP Mode Tables Main SP Tables-1 SP1-XXX (Feed) [Leading Edge Registration] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment (Tray Location, Paper Type, Color Mode), Paper Type: Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2 or Thick3 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration motor operation timing 1001 for each mode.
  • Page 754 3. SP Mode Tables 020 Duplex: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 021 Duplex: Special 1 *ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 1.1 / 0.1mm/step] 022 Tray: Special 1: 1200 *ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 1.1 / 0.1mm/step] 023 By-pass: Special 1: 1200 *ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 1.1 / 0.1mm/step]...
  • Page 755 Main SP Tables-1 004 Paper Tray 3 *ENG [-4.0 to 4.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] 005 Duplex *ENG [-4.0 to 4.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] [Paper Buckle] Paper Buckle Adjustment (Tray Location, Paper Type), Paper Type: N: Normal, TH: Thick 1003 Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller by changing the paper feed timing.
  • Page 756 3. SP Mode Tables 019 By-pass: Small *ENG [-5 to 5 / -2 / 1mm/step] [Reload Permit Setting] 1101 Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature in color mode. 001 Pre-rotation Start Temp. *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1deg/step] 002 Reload Target Temp.:Center *ENG [0 to 180 / 175 / 1/step]...
  • Page 757 Main SP Tables-1 023 Rotation Time:BW:Warm *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1sec/step] 024 Temp.:Delta:Hot:BW:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 60 / 1deg/step] 025 Temp.:Delta:Hot:BW:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 50 / 1/step] 026 Temp.:Delta:Hot:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 45 / 1deg/step] 027 Rotation Time:BW:Hot *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1sec/step]...
  • Page 758 3. SP Mode Tables 007 Temp.:Lower Delta:Center:Sp.1 *ENG [0 to 200 / 40 / 1deg/step] 008 Temp.:Lower Delta:End:Sp.1 *ENG 009 Temp.:Upper Delta:Center:Sp.1 *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1deg/step] 010 Temp.:Upper Delta:End:Sp.1 *ENG 011 Temp.:Lower Delta:Press:Sp.1 *ENG [0 to 200 / 95 / 1deg/step] 012 Rotation Time:Sp.1 *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1sec/step]...
  • Page 759 Main SP Tables-1 002 Plain1:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 150 / 1deg/step] 003 Plain1:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 145 / 1deg/step] 004 Plain1:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 150 /1deg/step] 005 Plain2:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 160 / 1deg/step] 006 Plain2:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 150 / 1deg/step]...
  • Page 760 3. SP Mode Tables 028 Thick3:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 150 / 1deg/step] 029 Special1:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 165 / 1deg/step] 030 Special1:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 150 / 1deg/step] 031 Special1:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 155 / 1deg/step] 032 Special1:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 150 / 1deg/step]...
  • Page 761 Main SP Tables-1 110 Thin:FC:Press:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 200 / 150 / 1deg/step] 111 Thin:BW:Center:Low Speed *ENG [100 to 180 / 120 / 1deg/step] 112 Thin:BW:Press:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 200 / 150 / 1deg/step] 113 M-thick:FC:Center:Low Speed *ENG [100 to 180 / 140 / 1deg/step] 114 M-thick:FC:Press:Low Speed *ENG...
  • Page 762 3. SP Mode Tables 142 Postcard:Thick1:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 150 / 1deg/step] 145 Postcard:Thick2:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 145 / 1deg/step] 146 Postcard:Thick2:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 150 / 1deg/step] 149 Postcard:Thick3:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 150 / 1deg/step] 150 Postcard:Thick3:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 150 / 1deg/step]...
  • Page 763 Main SP Tables-1 [After Reload/Job Target Temp.] 1108 Sets the target temperature for immediately after reload temperature has been achieved or paper has been fed. 001 Center *ENG [0 to 180 / 150 / 1deg/step] [Environment Correction:Fusing] 1111 Sets the threshold for fusing temperature correction to compensate for ambient conditions.
  • Page 764 3. SP Mode Tables Humidity:Threshold:M-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 1 / 1 %/step] Specifies the threshold between low and middle humidity. Humidity:Threshold:H-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step] Specifies the threshold between middle and high humidity. Permit Temp.:Delta:Press:M- *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1deg/step]...
  • Page 765 Main SP Tables-1 Execution mode *ENG [0 to 2 / 0:OFF / 1/step] Sets the scope of application for FB control pf the heat accumlated on the pressure roller. Time Out *ENG [0 to 200 / 10 / 1sec/step] Sets the time between paper feed starting and temperature correction starting. 021 to Sets the time until the pressre temperature is aquired from F GATE with normal speed or low speed.
  • Page 766 3. SP Mode Tables 057 Paper Thickness Coeff.:Thick3 *ENG [0 to 20000 / 80 / 1/step] 058 Paper Thickness Coeff.:Special1 *ENG [0 to 20000 / 80 / 1/step] 059 Paper Thickness Coeff.:Special2 *ENG [0 to 20000 / 80 / 1/step] 060 Paper Thickness Coeff.:Special3 *ENG [0 to 20000 / 80 / 1/step] 061 Paper Thickness Coeff.:Envelop...
  • Page 767 Main SP Tables-1 002 Control Time2:LT *ENG [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1sec/step] 003 Temp:Plain:Center1:LT *ENG [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1deg/step] 004 Temp:Plain:Press.1:LT *ENG 005 Temp:Plain:Center2:LT *ENG [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1deg/step] 006 Temp:Plain:Press.2:LT *ENG 007 Temp:M-Thick:Cneter1 *ENG [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1deg/step]...
  • Page 768 3. SP Mode Tables 042 Control Time2:LT:BW2 *ENG [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 sec/step] 043 Temp:Center1:LT:BW2 *ENG [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step] 044 Temp:Press.1:LT:BW2 *ENG 045 Temp:Center2:LT:BW2 *ENG [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step] 046 Temp:Press.2:LT:BW2 *ENG 051 Control Time1:A4:BW2...
  • Page 769 Main SP Tables-1 085 Temp:Center2:Envelope *ENG [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step] 086 Temp:Press.2:Envelope *ENG 091 Control Time1:Postcard *ENG [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 sec/step] 092 Control Time2:Postcard *ENG [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 sec/step] 093 Temp:Center1:Postcard *ENG [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 770 3. SP Mode Tables 006 End Uniform Start Temp.:A4 *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1deg/step] 007 End Uniform Start Temp.:A5 *ENG [0 to 250 / 190 / 1deg/step] 008 Overshoot Prevent Temp. *ENG [0 to 250 / 220 / 1deg/step] 009 Overshoot Prevent Time *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1sec/step]...
  • Page 771 Main SP Tables-1 006 High:1st CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 75 / 1%/step] 007 High:2nd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1%/step] 008 High:3rd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 25 / 1%/step] High:1st CPM Down *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1deg/step] Temp.:LT:sen4 High:2nd CPM Down...
  • Page 772 3. SP Mode Tables High:2st CPM Down *ENG [0 to 250 / 195 / 1deg/step] Temp.:Envelope:sen4 High:3st CPM Down *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1deg/step] Temp.:Envelope:sen4 High:1st CPM Down *ENG [0 to 250 / 190 / 1deg/step] Temp.:Postcard:sen4 High:2st CPM Down *ENG [0 to 250 / 195 / 1deg/step]...
  • Page 773 Main SP Tables-1 *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 205 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 210 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 190 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 195 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1deg/step] *ENG...
  • Page 774 3. SP Mode Tables *ENG [10 to 100 / 25 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 75 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 25 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 75 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1%/step] *ENG...
  • Page 775 Main SP Tables-1 High:2st CPM Down *ENG [0 to 250 / 195 / 1deg/step] Temp.:B6:sen2 High:3st CPM Down *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1deg/step] Temp.:B6:sen2 High:1st CPM Down *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1deg/step] Temp.:Envelope:sen2 High:2st CPM Down *ENG [0 to 250 / 205 / 1deg/step] Temp.:Envelope:sen2...
  • Page 776 3. SP Mode Tables *ENG [0 to 250 / 205 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 210 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 190 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 195 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 190 / 1deg/step] *ENG...
  • Page 777 Main SP Tables-1 *ENG [0 to 250 / 205 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 210 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 190 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 195 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 190 / 1deg/step] *ENG...
  • Page 778 3. SP Mode Tables *ENG [0 to 250 / 190 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 195 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 190 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 195 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1deg/step] *ENG...
  • Page 779 Main SP Tables-1 *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 190 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 195 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 190 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 195 / 1deg/step] *ENG...
  • Page 780 3. SP Mode Tables *ENG [0 to 250 / 195 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 190 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 195 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1deg/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 75 / 1%/step] *ENG...
  • Page 781 Main SP Tables-1 *ENG [0 to 250 / 195 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 190 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 195 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1deg/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 75 / 1%/step] *ENG...
  • Page 782 3. SP Mode Tables *ENG [0 to 250 / 190 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 195 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1deg/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 75 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 25 / 1%/step] *ENG...
  • Page 783 Main SP Tables-1 *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1deg/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 75 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 25 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 75 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1%/step] *ENG...
  • Page 784 3. SP Mode Tables *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 25 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 75 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 25 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 75 / 1%/step] *ENG...
  • Page 785 Main SP Tables-1 *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 25 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 75 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 25 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 75 / 1%/step] *ENG...
  • Page 786 3. SP Mode Tables *ENG [10 to 100 / 75 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 25 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 75 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 25 / 1%/step] *ENG...
  • Page 787 Main SP Tables-1 *ENG [10 to 100 / 25 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 75 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 25 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 75 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1%/step] *ENG...
  • Page 788 3. SP Mode Tables *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 25 / 1%/step] 1128 *ENG [10 to 100 / 75 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 25 / 1%/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1deg/step] *ENG...
  • Page 789 Main SP Tables-1 *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 25 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 75 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 25 / 1%/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1deg/step] *ENG...
  • Page 790 3. SP Mode Tables *ENG [10 to 100 / 75 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1%/step] *ENG [10 to 100 / 25 / 1%/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 205 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 210 / 1deg/step] *ENG...
  • Page 791 Main SP Tables-1 *ENG [10 to 100 / 25 / 1%/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 205 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 210 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 190 / 1deg/step] *ENG [0 to 250 / 195 / 1deg/step] *ENG...
  • Page 792 3. SP Mode Tables [0 to 2 / 0: Productivety Mode / 1/ step] 0: Productivety Model 001 Feed Permit Condition Setting *ENG 1: Fusing Quality 1 2: Fusing Quality 2 [Maximum Duty Switch] 1132 Switches maximum fixed duty level and power control. [0 or 1 / 1: Power Control / 1/step] 001 Control Method Switch *ENG...
  • Page 793 Main SP Tables-1 [Fusing SC Issue Time Info] 1141 Displays the time when an SC code was issued. 001 SC Number *ENG [0 to 99999 / - / 1/step] 002 SC Cause *ENG [0 to 99999 / - / 1/step] 101 Htg Roller:Ctr Diff1 *ENG [-50 to 260 / - / 1deg/step]...
  • Page 794 3. SP Mode Tables 207 Press Roller Temp Value3 *ENG [-50 to 260 / - / 1deg/step] 208 Press Roller.End Temp Value3 *ENG [-50 to 260 / - / 1deg/step] [Fusing Jam Detection] 1142 This SP displays the SC code that was issued if a fusing unit jam error occurs three times in succession.
  • Page 795 Main SP Tables-1 Time:Heat Storage Devision1 *ENG [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1sec/step] Sepcifies the execution time 1 for the warming up in the low temperature condition. Time:Heat Storage Devision2 *ENG [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1sec/step] Sepcifies the execution time 2 for the warming up in the low temperature condition. 1190 [Flicker Control] 001 Flicker Control...
  • Page 796 3. SP Mode Tables 018 transportM:Plain1/2:Glossy *ENG [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.00 / 0.01%/step] 019 transportM:M-Thick:Glossy *ENG [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.00 / 0.01%/step] 020 transportM:Postcard *ENG [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.00 / 0.01%/step] [-10.00 to 10.00 / 0.90 / 0.01%/ 026 FusingMot:Plain1/2 *ENG step]...
  • Page 797 Main SP Tables-1 [-10.00 to 10.00 / 1.50 / 0.01%/ 040 FusingMot:Special1:Low Speed *ENG step] [-10.00 to 10.00 / 1.50 / 0.01%/ 041 FusingMot:Special2:Low Speed *ENG step] [-10.00 to 10.00 / 1.50 / 0.01%/ 042 FusingMot:Special3:Low Speed *ENG step] 043 FusingMot:Plain1/2:Grossy *ENG 044 FusingMot:M-thick:Grossy *ENG...
  • Page 798 3. SP Mode Tables 009 Tray1 Clutch OFF: Thick *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1mm/step] 010 Tray1 Paper Sensor: Plain *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1mm/step] 011 Tray1 Paper Sensor: Middle Thick *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1mm/step] 012 Tray1 Paper Sensor: Thick *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1mm/step]...
  • Page 799 Main SP Tables-1 Tray2 Bank Paper Feed Interval: *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1mm/step] Plain Tray2 Bank Paper Feed Interval: *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1mm/step] Middle Thick Tray2 Bank Paper Feed Interval: *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1mm/step] Thick Tray3 Bank Paper Feed Interval: *ENG...
  • Page 800 3. SP Mode Tables Tray3 Bank Mimimum Page *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1mm/step] Interval: Middle Thick Tray3 Bank Mimimum Page *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1mm/step] Interval: Thick [Fan Cooling Time Set] 1950 Adjust the rotation time for each fan motor after a job end. 001 Imaging Cooling Fan *ENG [0 to 600 / 0 / 1sec/step]...
  • Page 801 Main SP Tables-1 fan setting with or without *ENG [0 or 1 / - / 1/step] operation 1954 Fan low noise mode end temperature 001 Fan Half Speed Control *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 0.1deg/step]...

  • Page 802: Main Sp Tables-2

    3. SP Mode Tables Main SP Tables-2 SP2-XXX (Drum) [Charge DC Voltage] 2005 Adjusts the DC component of the charge roller bias in the print modes. 001 Plain: Bk *ENG [0 to 1000 / 590 / 10 -V/step] 002 Plain: C *ENG [0 to 1000 / 590 / 10 -V/step] 003 Plain: M...
  • Page 803 Main SP Tables-2 [Charge AC Current: ML] 2008 Displays/sets the AC current target of the charge roller for ML environment (Middle temperature and Low humidity). 001 Environmental Target: Bk *ENG [0 to 2000 / 600 / 10uA/step] 002 Environmental Target: C *ENG [0 to 2000 / 600 / 10uA/step] 003 Environmental Target: M...
  • Page 804 3. SP Mode Tables 003 Environmental Target: M *ENG [0 to 2000 / 650 / 10uA/step] 004 Environmental Target: Y *ENG [0 to 2000 / 650 / 10uA/step] [Charge Output Control] 2012 Selects the AC voltage control type. 001 AC Voltage *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 2013...
  • Page 805 Main SP Tables-2 Changes the humidity threshold between MM and MH. DFU 005 Absolute Humidity: Thresh 3 *ENG [0.00 to 100.00 / 18.00 / 0.01 g/m step] Changes the humidity threshold between MH and HH. DFU 006 Absolute Humidity: Thresh 4 *ENG [0.00 to 100.00 / 24.00 / 0.01 g/m step]...
  • Page 806 3. SP Mode Tables 005 Relative Humidity Condition *ENG [0 to 99 / 50 / 1%RH/step] 006 Absolute Humidity Condition *ENG [0 to 99 / 12 / 1 g/m /step] 007 Temp Change: Threshold M *ENG [0 to 99 / 10 / 1 deg/step] Relative Humidity Change: *ENG [0 to 99 / 50 / 1%RH/step]...
  • Page 807 Main SP Tables-2 006 Execution Interval: Setting:4 *ENG [0 to 999 / 20 / 1page/step] 007 High Coverage Threshold:1 *ENG [0.00 to 100.00 / 10.00 / 0.01 %/step] 008 High Coverage Threshold:2 *ENG [0.00 to 60.00 / 20.00 / 0.01/step] 009 High Coverage Threshold:3 *ENG [0.00 to 100.00 / 0.50 / 0.01 %/step]...
  • Page 808 3. SP Mode Tables 032 Mode Counter:CMY *ENG [0 to 999 / - / 1page/step] 033 Execution Interval: Setting:5 *ENG [0 to 999 / 20 1page/step] 034 High Coverage Threshold:5 *ENG [0.00 to 100.00 / 60.00 / 0.01%/step] 035 Application Time:5 *ENG [0 to 99 / - / 1sec/step] [Registration Correction]...
  • Page 809 Main SP Tables-2 Color Main Mag.: High Speed: *ENG Color Main Mag.: High Speed: *ENG [-1.000 to 1.000 / 0.000 / 0.001/step] Color Main Mag.: High Speed: *ENG [Erase Margin Adjustment] (Area, Paper Size) 2103 Adjusts the erase margin by deleting image data at the margins. 001 Lead Edge Width *ENG [0.0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1mm/step]...
  • Page 810 3. SP Mode Tables 002 High Speed: Ma *ENG 003 High Speed: Cy *ENG 004 High Speed: Ye *ENG 009 Low Speed: Bk *ENG [50 to 120 / 100 / 1%/step] 010 Low Speed: Ma *ENG 011 Low Speed: Cy *ENG 012 Low Speed: Ye *ENG...
  • Page 811 Main SP Tables-2 0 None 11. Independent Pattern (1dot) 1: Vertical Line (1dot) 12. Independent Pattern (2dot) 2: Vertical Line (2dot) 13. Independent Pattern (4dot) 3: Horizontal (1dot) 14. Trimming Area 4: Horizontal (2dot) 16: Hound’s Tooth Check (Horizontal) 5: Grid Vertical Line 17: Band (Horizontal) 6: Grid Horizontal Line 18: Band (Vertical)
  • Page 812 3. SP Mode Tables [Execute] Executes the fine line position adjustment once. 002 Mode b If this SP is not completed, do SP2111-003 first and then try this SP again [Execute] Executes the rough line position adjustment once. 003 Mode c After doing this SP, make sure to execute SP2111-001 or -002.
  • Page 813 Main SP Tables-2 [TM/ID Sensor Check Result] Displays the maximum result values of the ID sensor check. 2140 Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process control 001 PWM: ID Sensor *ENG 005 PWM: Front *ENG [0 to 1024 / - / 1/step] 006 PWM: Center...
  • Page 814 3. SP Mode Tables [TM/ID Sensor Check Result] Displays the minimum result values of the ID sensor check. 2143 Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process control 001 Minimum: ID Sensor *ENG 005 Minimum: Front *ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / - / 0.01V/step] 006 Minimum: Center...
  • Page 815 Main SP Tables-2 005 Number of Edge Detection:Front *ENG Number of Edge *ENG [0 to 16 / - / 1/step] Detection:Center 007 Number of Edge Detection:Rear *ENG [Area Mag. Correction] LD Pulse Area Correction (Color, Area) FA Adjusts the magnification for each area. The main scan (297 mm) is divided into 13 areas. Area 1 is at the front side of the machine (left side of the image) and area 13 is at the rear side of the machine (right side of the image).
  • Page 816 3. SP Mode Tables 086 Area 7: Ma *ENG [-16.00 to 16.00 / 0.00 / 0.01dot/step] 087 Area 8: Ma *ENG [-16.00 to 16.00 / 0.00 / 0.01dot/step] 131 Area 0: Cy *ENG [-16.00 to 16.00 / 0.00 / 0.01dot/step] 132 Area 1: Cy *ENG [-16.00 to 16.00 / 0.00 / 0.01dot/step]...
  • Page 817 Main SP Tables-2 003 Area 2: Bk *ENG [-31 to 31 / 0 / 1/step] 004 Area 3: Bk *ENG [-31 to 31 / 0 / 1/step] 005 Area 4: Bk *ENG [-31 to 31 / 0 / 1/step] 006 Area 5: Bk *ENG [-31 to 31 / 0 / 1/step] 007 Area 6: Bk...
  • Page 818 3. SP Mode Tables 069 Area 4: Cy *ENG [-31 to 31 / 0 / 1/step] 070 Area 5: Cy *ENG [-31 to 31 / 0 / 1/step] 071 Area 6: Cy *ENG [-31 to 31 / 0 / 1/step] 072 Area 7: Cy *ENG [-31 to 31 / 0 / 1/step]...
  • Page 819 Main SP Tables-2 004 Area 3: Bk *ENG [1 to 63 / 5 / 1/step] 005 Area 4: Bk *ENG [1 to 63 / 5 / 1/step] 006 Area 5: Bk *ENG [1 to 63 / 5 / 1/step] 007 Area 6: Bk *ENG [1 to 63 / 5 / 1/step] 008 Area 7: Bk...
  • Page 820 3. SP Mode Tables 038 Area 5: Cy *ENG [1 to 63 / 5 / 1/step] 039 Area 6: Cy *ENG [1 to 63 / 5 / 1/step] 040 Area 7: Cy *ENG [1 to 63 / 5 / 1/step] 041 Area 8: Cy *ENG [1 to 63 / 5 / 1/step]...
  • Page 821 Main SP Tables-2 001 Front Beam Detecting Area: Bk *ENG 003 Front End Area: Bk *ENG 004 Front Beam Detecting Area: Ma *ENG 006 Front End Area: Ma *ENG [50 to 150 / 100 / 1%/step] 007 Front Beam Detecting Area: Cy *ENG 009 Front End Area: Cy *ENG...
  • Page 822 3. SP Mode Tables 001 Color Regist. 002 Main Scan Length Detection 003 MUSIC Result 004 Area Magnification Correction [Execute] Area Magnification Correction:unit2 006 Shading Correction:unit1 007 Shading Correction:unit2 [Line Position Adj. Result] Displays the values for each correction. "M. Cor.: Dot" indicates the dot correction value in the main scan direction. 2181 "M.
  • Page 823 Main SP Tables-2 030 M. Cor.: Subdot: C *ENG [-1.00 to 1.00 / - / 0.01dot/step] 033 C. Left Mag.: Subdot: M *ENG [-32.00 to 32.00 / - / 0.01dot/step] 034 C. Right Mag.: Subdot: M *ENG [-32.00 to 32.00 / - / 0.01dot/step] 035 S.
  • Page 824 3. SP Mode Tables 009 M. Scan: Low: Subdot: M *ENG [-1.00 to 1.00 / 0.00 / 0.01dot/step] 010 M. Scan: High: Dot: C *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1dot/step] 011 M. Scan: High: Subdot: C *ENG [-1.00 to 1.00 / 0.00 / 0.01dot/step] 014 M.
  • Page 825 Main SP Tables-2 [MUSIC Coefficient Setting] 2191 Position Adjustment: Coefficient Setting ch 0: ID sensor at rear, ch 1: ID sensor at center, ch 2: ID sensor at front 001 ch 0: Filter: Front: a1 [-131071 to 131071 / 125869 / 1bit/step] 002 ch 0: Filter: Front: a2 [-131071 to 131071 / -60488 / 1bit/step] 003 ch 0: Filter: Front: b0...
  • Page 826 3. SP Mode Tables 024 ch 2: Filter: Front: b1 [-131071 to 131071 / 77 / 1bit/step] 025 ch 2: Filter: Front: b2 [-131071 to 131071 / 39 / 1bit/step] 026 ch 2: Filter: Rear: a1 [-131071 to 131071 / 128596 / 1bit/step] 027 ch 2: Filter: Rear: a2 [-131071 to 131071 / -63398 / 1bit/step] 028 ch 2: Filter: Rear: b0...
  • Page 827 Main SP Tables-2 Page: Job End: BW+FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 500 / 1page/step] Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW and color printing mode after job end. Page: Job End: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1page/step] Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for color printing mode after job end.
  • Page 828 3. SP Mode Tables Temp. 2 *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1deg/step] Adjust the temperature change threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode a: adjustment twice). The timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of several conditions. Time 2 *ENG [1 to 9999 / 600 / 1minute/step]...
  • Page 829 Main SP Tables-2 009 Number of Failure *ENG [0 to 999999 / - / 1 times/step] 010 Error Result: C *ENG [0 to 9 / - / 1/step] 0: Not done 011 Error Result: M *ENG 1: Completed successfully 012 Error Result: Y *ENG 2: Cannot detect patterns 3: Fewer lines on the pattern than the target...
  • Page 830 3. SP Mode Tables 001 Standard Speed: Bk *ENG 002 Standard Speed: C *ENG 003 Standard Speed: M *ENG 004 Standard Speed: Y *ENG [0 to 800 / 450 / 1%/step] 009 Low Speed: Bk *ENG 010 Low Speed: C *ENG 011 Low Speed: M *ENG...
  • Page 831 Main SP Tables-2 Sets the environment condition manually. [0 to 6 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Automatic environment control 1: LL (Low temperature/ Low humidity) 2: ML (Middle temperature/ Low humidity) 002 Forced Setting *ENG 3: MM (Middle temperature/ Middle humidity) 4: MH (Middle temperature/ High humidity)
  • Page 832 3. SP Mode Tables [0 to 250 / 165 / 1mm/step] 002 Threshold 2 *ENG Threshold 2 ≤ paper ≤ Threshold 1: Paper is detected as "S2" size. [0 to 250 / 139 / 1mm/step] 003 Threshold 3 *ENG Threshold 3 ≤ paper ≤ Threshold 2: Paper is detected as "S3"...
  • Page 833 Main SP Tables-2 Negative:befor and afterProcon *ENG [10 to 995 / 100 / 10%/step] Adjusts the negative current limit of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper transfer roller. 005 Positive:prevention *ENG [0 to 2100 / 500 / 10V/step] 2327 [Transfer Roller CL:Bias] 001 Recovery...
  • Page 834 3. SP Mode Tables 2360 [Common:BW:Env.CorrectionTable] 001 Image Transfer:standard *ENG [1 to 100 / 20 / 1/step] 003 Image Transfer:low *ENG [1 to 100 / 53 / 1/step] 004 ImageTransfer:standard:Bk *ENG [1 to 100 / 20 / 1/step] 005 ImageTransfer:standard:C *ENG [1 to 100 / 20 / 1/step] 006 ImageTransfer:standard:M...
  • Page 835 Main SP Tables-2 [Plain1:Bias:FC] 2407 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain 1 paper in full color mode. 001 PaperTransfer:standard:1side *ENG [0 to 200 / 34 / 1-uA/step] 002 PaperTransfer:standard:2side *ENG [0 to 200 / 35 / 1-uA/step] 003 PaperTransfer:low:1side *ENG [0 to 200 / 22 / 1-uA/step]...
  • Page 836 3. SP Mode Tables [Plain1:SizeCorrection:FC] 2412 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. 001 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 002 PaperTransfer:Standard:2Sid:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 003 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 837 Main SP Tables-2 005 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 27 / 1/step] 006 PaperTransfer:Standard:2Sid:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 32 / 1/step] 007 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 36 / 1/step] 008 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 68 / 1/step] 009 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 23 / 1/step]...
  • Page 838 3. SP Mode Tables 011 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 22 / 1/step] 012 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 66 / 1/step] 013 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 48 / 1/step] 014 PaperTransfer:Standard:2Sid:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 69 / 1/step] 015 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 16 / 1/step]...
  • Page 839 Main SP Tables-2 006 Separation DC:Standard:2side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm/step] 007 Separation DC:Low:1side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm/step] 008 Separation DC:Low:2side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm/step] [Plain1:TrailEdgeCorrection] 2417 Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode.
  • Page 840 3. SP Mode Tables 2419 [Plain1:EnvCorrectionTable] 013 Separation DC:Standard:1side *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1/step] 014 Separation DC:Standard:2side *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1/step] 015 Separation DC:Low:1side *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1/step] 016 Separation DC:Low:2side *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1/step] 017 Separation DC:Standard:1side...
  • Page 841 Main SP Tables-2 [Plain2:Bias:FC] 2427 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain2 paper in full color mode. 001 PaperTransfer:standard:1side *ENG [0 to 200 / 34 / 1-uA/step] 002 PaperTransfer:standard:2side *ENG [0 to 200 / 35 / 1-uA/step] 003 PaperTransfer:low:1side *ENG [0 to 200 / 22 / 1-uA/step]...
  • Page 842 3. SP Mode Tables [Plain2:SizeCorrection:FC] 2432 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. 001 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 002 PaperTransfer:Standard:2Sid:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 003 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 843 Main SP Tables-2 005 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 27 / 1/step] 006 PaperTransfer:Standard:2Sid:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 32 / 1/step] 007 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 36 / 1/step] 008 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 68 / 1/step] 009 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 23 / 1/step]...
  • Page 844 3. SP Mode Tables 011 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 22 / 1/step] 012 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 66 / 1/step] 013 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 48 / 1/step] 014 PaperTransfer:Standard:2Sid:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 69 / 1/step] 015 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 16 / 1/step]...
  • Page 845 Main SP Tables-2 006 Separation DC:Standard:2side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm/step] 007 Separation DC:Low:1side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm/step] 008 Separation DC:Low:2side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm/step] [Plain2:TrailEdgeCorrection] 2437 Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode.
  • Page 846 3. SP Mode Tables 2439 [Plain2:EnvCorrectionTable] 013 Separation DC:Standard:1side *ENG 014 Separation DC:Standard:2side *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1/step] 015 Separation DC:Low:1side *ENG 016 Separation DC:Low:2side *ENG 017 Separation DC:Standard:1side *ENG 018 Separation DC:Standard:2side *ENG [1 to 100 / 50 / 1/step] 019 Separation DC:Low:1side *ENG 020 Separation DC:Low:2side...
  • Page 847 Main SP Tables-2 001 PaperTransfer:standard:1side *ENG [0 to 200 / 34 / 1-uA/step] 002 PaperTransfer:standard:2side *ENG [0 to 200 / 35 / 1-uA/step] 003 PaperTransfer:low:1side *ENG [0 to 200 / 21 / 1-uA/step] 004 PaperTransfer:low:2side *ENG [0 to 200 / 22 / 1-uA/step] [Middle:SizeCorrection:BW] 2451 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper...
  • Page 848 3. SP Mode Tables [Middle:SizeCorrection:FC] 2452 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. 001 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 002 PaperTransfer:Standard:2Sid:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 003 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 849 Main SP Tables-2 005 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 27 / 1/step] 006 PaperTransfer:Standard:2Sid:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 32 / 1/step] 007 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 74 / 1/step] 008 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 40 / 1/step] 009 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 17 / 1/step]...
  • Page 850 3. SP Mode Tables 011 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 37 / 1/step] 012 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 38 / 1/step] 013 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 19 / 1/step] 014 PaperTransfer:Standard:2Sid:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 49 / 1/step] 015 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 24 / 1/step]...
  • Page 851 Main SP Tables-2 006 Separation DC:Standard:2side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm/step] 007 Separation DC:Low:1side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm/step] 008 Separation DC:Low:2side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm/step] [Middle:TrailEdgeCorrection] 2457 Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode.
  • Page 852 3. SP Mode Tables 2459 [Middle:EnvCorrectionTable] 013 Separation DC:Standard:1side *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1/step] 014 Separation DC:Standard:2side *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1/step] 015 Separation DC:Low:1side *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1/step] 016 Separation DC:Low:2side *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1/step] 017 Separation DC:Standard:1side...
  • Page 853 Main SP Tables-2 001 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 003 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S1 *ENG 005 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S2 *ENG 007 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 135 / 5%/step] 009 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S3 *ENG 011 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S3 *ENG 013 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 220 / 5%/step] 015 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S4 *ENG [Thin:SizeCorrection:FC]...
  • Page 854 3. SP Mode Tables 007 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 21 / 1/step] 009 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 8 / 1/step] 011 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 21 / 1/step] 013 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 16 / 1/step] 015 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 21 / 1/step]...
  • Page 855 Main SP Tables-2 [Thin:SwitchTimingLeadEdge] 2476 Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area. 001 PaperTransfer:Standard:1side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm/step] 003 Paper Transfer:Low:1side *ENG 005 Separation DC:Standard:1side...
  • Page 856 3. SP Mode Tables 013 Separation DC:Standard:1side *ENG 015 Separation DC:Low:1side *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1/step] 017 Separation DC:Standard:1side *ENG 019 Separation DC:Low:1side *ENG [Thick1:Bias] 2481 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick 1 paper. 003 Separation DC:1side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 0 / 10-V/step]...
  • Page 857 Main SP Tables-2 012 PaperTransfer:2Side:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 250 / 5%/step] 015 PaperTransfer:1Side:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 233 / 5%/step] 016 PaperTransfer:2Side:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 361 / 5%/step] [Thick1:SizeCorrection:FC] 2492 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size.
  • Page 858 3. SP Mode Tables [Thick1:Size-Env.Correct:FC] 2494 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. 003 PaperTransfer:1Side:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 24 / 1/step] 004 PaperTransfer:2Side:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 21 / 1/step] 007 PaperTransfer:1Side:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 33 / 1/step]...
  • Page 859 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick1:TrailEdgeCorrection] 2497 Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode. 003 Paper Transfer:1side *ENG 004 Paper Transfer:2side *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 007 Separation DC:1side *ENG 008 Separation DC:2side *ENG...
  • Page 860 3. SP Mode Tables [Thick2:Bias:BW 2503 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 2 paper in black-and-white mode. Middle: 182 mm/sec, Low: 85 mm/sec 003 PaperTransfer:1side *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1-uA/step] 004 PaperTransfer:2side *ENG [0 to 200 / 18 / 1-uA/step] [Thick2:Bias:FC] 2507...
  • Page 861 Main SP Tables-2 003 PaperTransfer:1Side:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 004 PaperTransfer:2Side:S1 *ENG 007 PaperTransfer:1Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 158 / 5%/step] 008 PaperTransfer:2Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 180 / 5%/step] 011 PaperTransfer:1Side:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 211 / 5%/step] 012 PaperTransfer:2Side:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 260 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 862 3. SP Mode Tables 008 PaperTransfer:2Side:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 50 / 1/step] 011 PaperTransfer:1Side:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 27 / 1/step] 012 PaperTransfer:2Side:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 38 / 1/step] 015 PaperTransfer:1Side:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 17 / 1/step] 016 PaperTransfer:2Side:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 72 / 1/step]...
  • Page 863 Main SP Tables-2 003 Paper Transfer:1side *ENG 004 Paper Transfer:2side *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 007 Separation DC:1side *ENG 008 Separation DC:2side *ENG [Thick2:SwitchTimingTrailEdge] 2518 Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode.
  • Page 864 3. SP Mode Tables [Thick3:Bias:FC] 2527 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 3 in full color mode. 003 PaperTransfer:1side *ENG [0 to 200 / 18 / 1-uA/step] 004 PaperTransfer:2side *ENG [0 to 200 / 20 / 1-uA/step] [Thick3:SizeCorrection:BW] 2531 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper...
  • Page 865 Main SP Tables-2 016 PaperTransfer:2Side:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 375 / 5%/step] [Thick3:Size-Env.Correct:BW] 2533 Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. 003 PaperTransfer:1Side:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 63 / 1/step] 004 PaperTransfer:2Side:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 32 / 1/step]...
  • Page 866 3. SP Mode Tables [Thick3:LeadingEdgeCorrection] 2535 Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode. 003 Paper Transfer:1side *ENG 004 Paper Transfer:2side *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 007 Separation DC:1side *ENG 008 Separation DC:2side *ENG...
  • Page 867 Main SP Tables-2 003 Paper Transfer:1side *ENG 004 Paper Transfer:2side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm/step] 007 Separation DC:1side *ENG 008 Separation DC:2side *ENG [Thick3:EnvCorrectionTable] 2539 Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode. When the environment is detected as MM, SP2651 and SP2652 are multiplied by these SP values.
  • Page 868 3. SP Mode Tables 007 PaperTransfer:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 /150 / 5%/step] 011 PaperTransfer:S3 *ENG 015 PaperTransfer:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 /200 / 5%/step] [OHP:SizeCorrection:FC] 2552 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size.
  • Page 869 Main SP Tables-2 [OHP:LeadingEdgeCorrection] 2555 Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode. 003 Paper Transfer *ENG [100 to 995 /100 / 5%/step] 007 Separation DC *ENG [OHP:SwitchTimingLeadEdge] 2556 Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
  • Page 870 3. SP Mode Tables [Special1:Bias] 2561 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for special paper 1. Standard: 260 mm/sec, Low: 85 mm/sec 001 Separation DC:standard:1side *ENG 002 Separation DC:standard:2side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 2000 / 10-V/step] 003 Separation DC:low:1side *ENG 004 Separation DC:low:2side *ENG...
  • Page 871 Main SP Tables-2 001 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S1 *ENG 002 PaperTransfer:Standard:2Sid:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 003 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S1 *ENG 004 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S1 *ENG 005 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 135 / 5%/step] 006 PaperTransfer:Standard:2Sid:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 200 / 5%/step] 007 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 135 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 872 3. SP Mode Tables 007 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 135 / 5%/step] 008 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 200 / 5%/step] 009 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 135 / 5%/step] 010 PaperTransfer:Standard:2Sid:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 325 / 5%/step] 011 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 135 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 873 Main SP Tables-2 013 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Sid:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 14 / 1%/step] 014 PaperTransfer:Standard:2Sid:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 13 / 1%/step] 015 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 10 / 1%/step] 016 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 12 / 1%/step] [Special1:Size-Env.Correct:FC] 2574 Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each...
  • Page 874 3. SP Mode Tables [Special1:LeadingEdgeCorrection] 2575 Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode. 001 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Side *ENG 002 PaperTransfer:Standard:2Side *ENG 003 Paper Transfer:Low:1side *ENG 004 Paper Transfer:Low:2side *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 005 Separation DC:Standard:1side *ENG 006 Separation DC:Standard:2side...
  • Page 875 Main SP Tables-2 001 PaperTransfer:Standard:1Side *ENG 002 PaperTransfer:Standard:2Side *ENG 003 Paper Transfer:Low:1side *ENG 004 Paper Transfer:Low:2side *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 005 Separation DC:Standard:1side *ENG 006 Separation DC:Standard:2side *ENG 007 Separation DC:Low:1side *ENG 008 Separation DC:Low:2side *ENG [Special1:SwitchTimingTrailEdge] 2578 Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing...
  • Page 876 3. SP Mode Tables 017 Separation DC:Standard:1side *ENG 018 Separation DC:Standard:2side *ENG [1 to 100 / 50 / 1/step] 019 Separation DC:Low:1side *ENG 020 Separation DC:Low:2side *ENG [Special2:Bias] 2581 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for special paper 2. 001 Separation DC:standard:1side *ENG 002 Separation DC:standard:2side...
  • Page 877 Main SP Tables-2 [Special2:SizeCorrection:BW] 2591 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. 001 PaperTransfer:standard:1Sid:S1 *ENG 002 PaperTransfer:standard:2Sid:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 003 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S1 *ENG 004 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S1 *ENG 005 PaperTransfer:standard:1Sid:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step] 006 PaperTransfer:standard:2Sid:S2...
  • Page 878 3. SP Mode Tables 005 PaperTransfer:standard:1Sid:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step] 006 PaperTransfer:standard:2Sid:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 160 / 5%/step] 007 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step] 008 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 160 / 5%/step] 009 PaperTransfer:standard:1Sid:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 879 Main SP Tables-2 011 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 18 / 1/step] 012 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 23 / 1/step] 013 PaperTransfer:standard:1Sid:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 20 / 1/step] 014 PaperTransfer:standard:2Sid:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 19 / 1/step] 015 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 18 / 1/step]...
  • Page 880 3. SP Mode Tables [Special2:LeadingEdgeCorrection] 2595 Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode. 001 PaperTransfer:standard:1Side *ENG 002 PaperTransfer:standard:2Side *ENG 003 Paper Transfer:Low:1side *ENG 004 Paper Transfer:Low:2side *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 005 Separation DC:standard:1side *ENG 006 Separation DC:standard:2side...
  • Page 881 Main SP Tables-2 001 PaperTransfer:standard:1Side *ENG 002 PaperTransfer:standard:2Side *ENG 003 Paper Transfer:Low:1side *ENG 004 Paper Transfer:Low:2side *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 005 Separation DC:standard:1side *ENG 006 Separation DC:standard:2side *ENG 007 Separation DC:Low:1side *ENG 008 Separation DC:Low:2side *ENG [Special2:SwitchTimingTrailEdge] 2598 Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing...
  • Page 882 3. SP Mode Tables 013 Separation DC:standard:1side *ENG 014 Separation DC:standard:2side *ENG 015 Separation DC:Low:1side *ENG 016 Separation DC:Low:2side *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1/step] 017 Separation DC:standard:1side *ENG 018 Separation DC:standard:2side *ENG 019 Separation DC:Low:1side *ENG 020 Separation DC:Low:2side *ENG [Special3:Bias] 2601...
  • Page 883 Main SP Tables-2 002 PaperTransfer:standard:2side *ENG [0 to 200 / 14 / 1-uA/step] 003 PaperTransfer:low:1side *ENG [0 to 200 / 11 / 1-uA/step] 004 PaperTransfer:low:2side *ENG [0 to 200 / 12 / 1-uA/step] [Special3:SizeCorrection:BW] 2611 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size.
  • Page 884 3. SP Mode Tables 001 PaperTransfer:standard:1Sid:S1 *ENG 002 PaperTransfer:standard:2Sid:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 003 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S1 *ENG 004 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S1 *ENG 005 PaperTransfer:standard:1Sid:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step] 006 PaperTransfer:standard:2Sid:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 160 / 5%/step] 007 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 885 Main SP Tables-2 007 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 24 / 1/step] 008 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 22 / 1/step] 009 PaperTransfer:standard:1Sid:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 24 / 1/step] 010 PaperTransfer:standard:2Sid:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 22 / 1/step] 011 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 24 / 1/step]...
  • Page 886 3. SP Mode Tables 013 PaperTransfer:standard:1Sid:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 24 / 1/step] 014 PaperTransfer:standard:2Sid:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 27 / 1/step] 015 PaperTransfer:Low:1Side:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 24 / 1/step] 016 PaperTransfer:Low:2Side:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 27 / 1/step] [Special3:LeadingEdgeCorrection] 2615 Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in...
  • Page 887 Main SP Tables-2 001 Paper Transfer:standard:1side *ENG 002 Paper Transfer:standard:2side *ENG 003 Paper Transfer:Low:1side *ENG 004 Paper Transfer:Low:2side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm/step] 005 Separation DC:standard:1side *ENG 006 Separation DC:standard:2side *ENG 007 Separation DC:Low:1side *ENG 008 Separation DC:Low:2side *ENG [Special3:TrailEdgeCorrection] 2617...
  • Page 888 3. SP Mode Tables 001 Paper Transfer:standard:1side *ENG 002 Paper Transfer:standard:2side *ENG 003 Paper Transfer:Low:1side *ENG 004 Paper Transfer:Low:2side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm/step] 005 Separation DC:standard:1side *ENG 006 Separation DC:standard:2side *ENG 007 Separation DC:Low:1side *ENG 008 Separation DC:Low:2side *ENG 2619 [Special3:EnvCorrectionTable]...
  • Page 889 Main SP Tables-2 004 PaperTransfer:2side *ENG [0 to 200 / 11 / 1-uA/step] [Thick2:Bias:FC] 2627 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 2 paper in full color mode. 003 PaperTransfer:1side *ENG [0 to 200 / 11 / 1-uA/step] 004 PaperTransfer:2side *ENG [0 to 200 / 16 / 1-uA/step]...
  • Page 890 3. SP Mode Tables 015 PaperTransfer:1Side:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 200 / 5%/step] 016 PaperTransfer:2Side:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 435 / 5%/step] [Thick2:Size-Env.Correct:BW] 2633 Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size.
  • Page 891 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick2:LeadingEdgeCorrection] 2635 Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode. 003 Paper Transfer:1side *ENG 004 Paper Transfer:2side *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 007 Separation DC:1side *ENG 008 Separation DC:2side *ENG...
  • Page 892 3. SP Mode Tables 003 Paper Transfer:1side *ENG 004 Paper Transfer:2side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm/step] 007 Separation DC:1side *ENG 008 Separation DC:2side *ENG 2639 [Thick2:EnvCorrectionTable] 015 Separation DC:1side *ENG 016 Separation DC:2side *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1/step] 019 Separation DC:1side *ENG 020 Separation DC:2side...
  • Page 893 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick2:SizeCorrection:BW] 2651 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. 003 PaperTransfer:1Side:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 004 PaperTransfer:2Side:S1 *ENG 007 PaperTransfer:1Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step] 008 PaperTransfer:2Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 160 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 894 3. SP Mode Tables 004 PaperTransfer:2Side:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 22 / 1/step] 007 PaperTransfer:1Side:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 18 / 1/step] 008 PaperTransfer:2Side:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 22 / 1/step] 011 PaperTransfer:1Side:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 18 / 1/step] 012 PaperTransfer:2Side:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 22 / 1/step]...
  • Page 895 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick2:SwitchTimingLeadEdge] 2656 Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area. 003 Paper Transfer:1side *ENG 004 Paper Transfer:2side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm/step] 007 Separation DC:1side *ENG...
  • Page 896 3. SP Mode Tables [Thick2:Bias] 2661 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick2 paper. 003 Separation DC:1side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 2000 / 10-V/step] 004 Separation DC:2side *ENG [Thick2:Bias:BW 2663 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 2 paper in black-and-white mode. 003 PaperTransfer:1side *ENG [0 to 200 / 8 / 1-uA/step]...
  • Page 897 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick2:SizeCorrection:FC] 2672 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. 003 PaperTransfer:1Side:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 004 PaperTransfer:2Side:S1 *ENG 007 PaperTransfer:1Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step] 008 PaperTransfer:2Side:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 160 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 898 3. SP Mode Tables 004 PaperTransfer:2Side:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 38 / 1/step] 007 PaperTransfer:1Side:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 13 / 1/step] 008 PaperTransfer:2Side:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 38 / 1/step] 011 PaperTransfer:1Side:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 13 / 1/step] 012 PaperTransfer:2Side:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 38 / 1/step]...
  • Page 899 Main SP Tables-2 003 Paper Transfer:1side *ENG 004 Paper Transfer:2side *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 007 Separation DC:1side *ENG 008 Separation DC:2side *ENG [Thick2:SwitchTimingTrailEdge] 2678 Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode.
  • Page 900 3. SP Mode Tables 2900 [Fus.Reload:DrumIdleTimeOffset] 001 Normal Speed *ENG [0 to 30 / 0 / 1s/step] 003 Low Speed *ENG [Fus.Reload:DrumIdleTimeOffset] 2901 Offset coverage for idling rotation time of drum when fusing down reloads. 001 Coverage:0-6% *ENG [-60 to 300 / 0 / 1sec/step] 002 Coverage:6-10% *ENG [-60 to 300 / -11 / 1sec/step]...
  • Page 901 Main SP Tables-2 Counter K [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1mm/step] Rotation counter (Bk) to determine if development roller reverse is required or not. Counter Cl [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1mm/step] Rotation counter (Color) to determine if development roller reverse is required or not. 2915 [GainAdj:BkOpcDevM] 001 Standard Speed...
  • Page 902 3. SP Mode Tables 003 T5:Bk:low *ENG [-210 to 210 / -10 / 10msec/step] 004 T7:Fc:low *ENG [-210 to 210 / -30 / 10msec/step] [Process Interval] 2960 Adjusts the additional time for ending the machine's process. 001 Additional Time *ENG [0 to 10 / 0 / 1sec/step] [Cleaning After JOB] 2970...
  • Page 903 Main SP Tables-2 2990 [Print Duty Control] Duty Control State *ENG [0 to 1 / - / 1/step] Displays the Duty limitation status of the current printing. 0: Not limited 1: Limited Exec Interval: Duty Control *ENG [30 to 3600 / 30 / 10sec/step] Sets the determination time interval to determine if the printing Duty limitation is executed or not.
  • Page 904 3. SP Mode Tables ON/OFF setting *ENG [0 or 1 / – / 1/step] Control or not control the printing Duty limitation. 0: Not control 1: Control...

  • Page 905: Main Sp Tables-3

    Main SP Tables-3 Main SP Tables-3 SP3-XXX (Process) 3011 [Manual ProCon:Exe] [- / - / -] 001 Normal ProCon *ENG [Execute] [- / - / -] 002 Density Adjustment *ENG [Execute] [- / - / -] 003 ACC RunTime ProCon *ENG [Execute] [- / - / -]...
  • Page 906 3. SP Mode Tables 3030 [Init TD Sensor :Exe] [- / - / -] 001 Execute:ALL *ENG [Execute] [- / - / -] 002 Execute:Col *ENG [Execute] [- / - / -] 003 Execute:K *ENG [Execute] [- / - / -] 004 Execute:C *ENG [Execute]...
  • Page 907 Main SP Tables-3 Displays the execution result of TD sensor initialization. 001 From Left:YMCK *ENG [0 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 3050 [Force Tnr Supply:Exe] [- / - / -] 001 Execute:ALL *ENG [Execute] [- / - / -] 002 Execute:Col *ENG [Execute]...
  • Page 908 3. SP Mode Tables 3073 [TD.Sens Chk] 001 Disp Vt:K *ENG 002 Disp Vt:C *ENG [0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01V/step] 003 Disp Vt:M *ENG 004 Disp Vt:Y *ENG 3074 [Force Tnr Supply:Exe] [- / - / -] 001 RepeatCount *ENG [Execute] 3075...
  • Page 909 Main SP Tables-3 001 Bk *ENG Displays the toner remainig status. 002 C *ENG [0 to 2 / - / 1/step] 003 M *ENG 0: Full, 1: NE, 2:TE 004 Y *ENG 3102 [Toner Remaining: Display] 001 Bottle Motor: Bk *ENG Displays the toner remainig amount calculated 002 Bottle Motor: C...
  • Page 910 3. SP Mode Tables 002 Bottle Motor Consumption:C *ENG [0.000 to 500.000 / - /0.001g/step] 003 Bottle Motor Consumption:M *ENG [0.000 to 500.000 / - /0.001g/step] 004 ottle Motor Consumption:Y *ENG [0.000 to 500.000 / - /0.001g/step] 011 Pixel Consumption:Bk *ENG [0.000 to 500.000 / - /0.001g/step] 012 ixel Consumption:C...
  • Page 911 Main SP Tables-3 001 Bk *ENG [0.000 to 1.000 / 0.550 / 0.001mg/cm2/ 002 C *ENG step] 003 M *ENG [0.000 to 1.000 / 0.600 / 0.001mg/cm2/ 004 Y *ENG step] 3120 [TE Sn Detect Thresh] 001 Bk *ENG Sets the remaing amount (%) for strating the NE 002 C *ENG detection with end sensor.
  • Page 912 3. SP Mode Tables 001 Data N: Bk *ENG Displays the number of sumpling times with end 002 Data N: C *ENG sensor. 003 Data N: M *ENG [0 to 9 / - / 1times/step] 004 Data N: Y *ENG 011 Counter n: Bk *ENG Displays the number of output times of no toner...
  • Page 913 Main SP Tables-3 Sets toner end threshold to sum delta Vt after 001 Delta Vt Thresh *ENG [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.50 / 0.01V/step] Sets toner end threshold for TE detecion delta Vt after NE. 002 Delta Vt Sum Thresh *ENG [0 to 99 / 10 / 1V/step] Sets toner end threshold to sum delta Vt before...
  • Page 914 3. SP Mode Tables 001 Bk *ENG 002 C *ENG Displays sum of delta Vt for each color. [0 to 99 / - / 0.01/step] 003 M *ENG 004 Y *ENG 3140 [Toner Filling Condition] Filling end condition to sub hopper. 001 TE Sensor On Count *ENG [1 to 5 / 3 / 1times/step]...
  • Page 915 Main SP Tables-3 001 HL:K *ENG 002 HL:C *ENG 003 HL:M *ENG 004 HL:Y *ENG 011 HM:K *ENG Displays TD sensor sensitivity culculated with 012 HM:C *ENG check value of HST density control (SP3711- xxx to 3714-xxx). 013 HM:M *ENG [0.200 to 1.000 / - / 0.001-V/wt%/step] 014 HM:Y *ENG...
  • Page 916 3. SP Mode Tables 001 Current: K *ENG Displays the lateset TD sensor output for each 002 Current: C *ENG color. 003 Current: M *ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / - / 0.01V/step] 004 Current: Y *ENG 3211 [Vt Limits Err :Disp] Sets Vt upper limit threshold to detect upper limit error.
  • Page 917 Main SP Tables-3 Sets the correction value (K) at low speed to correct Vt shift. 011 Low Spd:K *ENG [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.34 / 0.01V/step] 012 Low Spd:C *ENG Sets the correction value (for each color) at low speed to correct Vt shift. 013 Low Spd:M *ENG [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.41 / 0.01V/step]...
  • Page 918 3. SP Mode Tables 3219 [TD.Sens:Vt':Disp] 001 Vt' 0Current:K *ENG [0.00 to / - / 0.01V/step] 002 Vt' 0Current:C *ENG [0.00 to / - / 0.01V/step] 003 Vt' 0Current:M *ENG [0.00 to / - / 0.01V/step] 004 Vt' 0Current:Y *ENG [0.00 to / - / 0.01V/step] 021 Vt' 2Current:K *ENG...
  • Page 919 Main SP Tables-3 011 Initial: K *ENG Displays the target value of TD sensor output 012 Initial: C *ENG voltage at TD sensor initial settings execution. 013 Initial: M *ENG [0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step] 014 Initial: Y *ENG 021 Pixel Correction: K *ENG...
  • Page 920 3. SP Mode Tables 021 High Coverage Coeff:K *ENG Sets the coefficient Vtref to determine the Vtref 022 High Coverage Coeff:C *ENG correction value with high image coverage. 023 High Coverage Coeff:M *ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / 0.4 / 0.1/step] 024 High Coverage Coeff:Y *ENG Sets process control flag and executes process...
  • Page 921 Main SP Tables-3 Controls On/Off for potential Vtref correction. 001 ON/OFF *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 0:OFF, 1:ON 011 Corr Amt(+):K *ENG Sets Vtref correction value for (+) side to control 012 Corr Amt(+):C *ENG toner density to lower with developer gamma in potential control.
  • Page 922 3. SP Mode Tables 001 DotCoverage:K *ENG 002 DotCoverage:C *ENG Diplays image coverage of the latest page. [0.00 to 100.00 / - / 0.01%/step] 003 DotCoverage:M *ENG 004 DotCoverage:Y *ENG 011 DC Avg.:S:K *ENG Diplays the cumulative average (S) of image 012 DC Avg.:S:C *ENG coverage for the latest page.
  • Page 923 Main SP Tables-3 Sets the cumulative pages (L2). 053 TotalPage:S:Set *ENG [1 to 999 / 50 / 1sheets/step] 3252 [AccumImgArea :Disp] 001 ImgArea:K *ENG 002 ImgArea:C *ENG Displays accumulate of image area. [0 to 65535 / - / 1cm^2/step] 003 ImgArea:M *ENG 004 ImgArea:Y *ENG...
  • Page 924 3. SP Mode Tables 3311 [ID.Sens :Vmin] Displays Vmin output of tone pattern for black. 001 Vmin_K *ENG [0.000 to 5.000 / - / 0.001/step] 3312 [ID.Sens :Vct] Displays the normal reflection output of crosstalk. 001 Vct_reg *ENG [0.000 to 5.000 / - / 0.001V/step] Displays the diffused reflection output of crosstalk.
  • Page 925 Main SP Tables-3 Sets Vsg adjustment execution Page interval determined during printin or at the end of printing. 020 Interval :Set *ENG Note: Vsg adjustment is executed when process control or MUSIC requires the execution. (Not executed by it.) [0 to 2000 / 500 / 1page/step] Displays Page counter used Vsg execution determination.
  • Page 926 3. SP Mode Tables Displays Vsg adjusted ID sensor LED current. 011 Ifsg *ENG [[0.0 to 50.0 / - / 0.1mA/step] 021 Ifsg: TM(Front) *ENG Displays Vsg adjusted ID sensor LED current (TM_Front, TM_Center or TM_Rear sensor). 022 Ifsg: TM(Center) *ENG [0.0 to 50.0 / - / 0.1mA/step] 023 Ifsg: TM(Rear)
  • Page 927 Main SP Tables-3 Sets the upper limit of valid range of normalized value for normal reflection light 004 Kn: Lower *ENG using the sensitivity correction (K5). [0.00 to 1.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step] Sets the lower limit of valid range of normalized value for normal reflection light 005 Kn: Upper *ENG...
  • Page 928 3. SP Mode Tables [0.0000 to 1.0000 / 0.0018 / 041 Vct_reg Check:Slope *ENG 0.0001V/mA/step] 046 Vct_reg Check:Xint *ENG [0.0 to 25.5 / 0.0 / 0.1mA/step] [0.0000 to 1.0000 / 0.0027 / 051 Vct_dif Check:Slope *ENG 0.0001V/mA/step] 056 Vct_dif Check:Xint *ENG [0.0 to 25.5 / 0.0 / 0.1mA/step] 3332...
  • Page 929 Main SP Tables-3 3421 [TnrSplyAbility] 001 K *ENG Sets toner supply ability to developer from sub 002 C *ENG hopper. 003 M *ENG [0.001 to 2.000 / 0.350 / 0.001/step] 004 Y *ENG 011 TnrSplyAbilityCoef1 *ENG 012 TnrSplyAbilityCoef2 *ENG 013 TnrSplyAbilityCoef3 *ENG 014 TnrSplyAbilityCoef4 *ENG...
  • Page 930 3. SP Mode Tables 041 Environ Coef1 *ENG Sets environment correction coeficient 1, 2, 3 042 Environ Coef2 *ENG or 4 that corrects supply ability by absolute humidity. 043 Environ Coef3 *ENG [0.50 to 2.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step] 044 Environ Coef4 *ENG 3422 [Tnr Supply Limits :Set]...
  • Page 931 Main SP Tables-3 3431 [DrvTime: Setting] 001 Tmon:K *ENG Sets supply on time per one supply at divided 002 Tmon:C *ENG supply control. 003 Tmon:M *ENG [50 to 1000 / 200 / 50msec/step] 004 Tmon:Y *ENG 011 Tmoff(min.):K *ENG Sets the minimum supply time for toner supply 012 Tmoff(min.):C *ENG CL (or Mt).
  • Page 932 3. SP Mode Tables 011 Pixel Proportion: K *ENG Sets supply coeficient to supply toner 012 Pixel Proportion: C *ENG proportionate to output imang pixel (Pxl) at toner supply control. 013 Pixel Proportion: M *ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / 0.60 / 0.01/step] 014 Pixel Proportion: Y *ENG 021 Pixel Proportion 2: K...
  • Page 933 Main SP Tables-3 071 Vt Integral Control: K *ENG Sets the supply coeficient to supply toner 072 Vt Integral Control: C *ENG proportionate to the pixel (Pxl) of output image at toner supply control. 073 Vt Integral Control: M *ENG [0 to 2550 / 500 / 1/step] 074 Vt Integral Control: Y *ENG...
  • Page 934 3. SP Mode Tables 3461 [TonerSupply :DANC] Changes the request values of PI at one time. 001 PI:Power *ENG [5 to 200 / 100 / 1%/step] Sets I gain. 011 PI:I Gain *ENG [0.00000 to 0.10000 / 0.01000 / 0.00001/step] Sets P gain.
  • Page 935 Main SP Tables-3 Sets the of all ANC filters. 101 ANC:Gain *ENG [0.00 to 2.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step] Sets the liner speed correction to the gain of all ANC filters (Low speed). 103 ANC:Rate:LowSpd *ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step] 3463 [TonerSupply :DANC] Sets the value for I storge corresponding to the...
  • Page 936 3. SP Mode Tables 001 ALL *ENG Sets to off for the execution determination of all image processing adjustments, potential 002 ProCon *ENG controls, MUSIC condition adjustments, or TD sensor initial settings. 003 MUSIC *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 004 Init TD Sensor *ENG 0:OFF, 1:ON...
  • Page 937 Main SP Tables-3 Sets the execution flag for MUSIC. 024 MUSIC *ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] Sets the execution flag for Vsg adjustment. 025 Vsg Adj. *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Sets the execution flag for charge roller cleaning.
  • Page 938 3. SP Mode Tables 3522 [Drum Stop Environ :Disp] Displays the temperature at the end of the image processing. 001 Temperature *ENG [-1280.0 to 1270.0 / - / 0.1deg/step] Displays the relative humidity at the end of the image processing. 002 Rel Humidity *ENG [0.0 to 1000.0 / - / 0.1%RH/step]...
  • Page 939 Main SP Tables-3 001 Non-use Time Setting *ENG [0 to 1440 / 360 / 1minute/step] 002 Temperature Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 10 / 1deg/step] 003 Relative Humidity Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 50 / 1%RH/step] 004 Absolute Humidity Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 6 / 1g/m3/step] 005 Interval:BW...
  • Page 940 3. SP Mode Tables Sets the correction coeficient (Mid) of page interval for interrupt process control. 004 Corr(Mid):BW *ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step] Sets the page interval for interrupt process control. 011 Interval:Set:FC *ENG [0 to 5000 / 200 / 1sheets/step] Displays the page interval for interrupt process control.
  • Page 941 Main SP Tables-3 Displays the page interval for job end process control. 012 Interval:Disp:FC *ENG [0 to 5000 / - / 1sheets/step] Sets the correctin coeficient (Short) for job end process control. 013 Corr(Short):FC *ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.50 / 0.01/step] Sets the correctin coeficient (Mid) for job end process control.
  • Page 942 3. SP Mode Tables Sets on/off for non-use time correction of the developer agitating time. 030 ON/OFF(by Non-use Time) *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 0:OFF, 1:ON 031 by Non-use Time:1 *ENG [0 to 3000 / 0 / 1sec/step] 032 by Non-use Time:2 *ENG [0 to 3000 / 0 / 1sec/step]...
  • Page 943 Main SP Tables-3 by Non-use Time Threshold: *ENG [0 to 30000 / 2880 / 1min/step] Sets on/off for image area correction of the developer agitating time. 050 ON/OFF(by Non-use Time) *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step] 0:OFF, 1:ON 051 byDotCoverage:1 *ENG [0 to 3000 / 0 / 1sec/step]...
  • Page 944 3. SP Mode Tables 3550 [Refresh Mode] 001 Required Area: K *ENG 002 Required Area: C *ENG Displays the image area requiring the reflesh. [0 to 65535 / - / 1cm^2/step] 003 Required Area: M *ENG 004 Required Area: Y *ENG Dev.
  • Page 945 Main SP Tables-3 Sets the upper limit of number of toner refleshs performes at the same time of process control. 081 Max Counts *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 1/step] 3552 [Blade damage prevention mode] Sets the temperature threshold of blade damege prevention mode execution.
  • Page 946 3. SP Mode Tables Sets the LD control mode. 002 LD Control *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 0:OFF, 1:ON Sets the execution timing for toner density adjustment process control. [0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step] 003 TC Adj. Mode *ENG 0:Do Not Execute 1:1st Power On...
  • Page 947 Main SP Tables-3 001 Std Speed: K *ENG 002 Std Speed: C *ENG 003 Std Speed: M *ENG 004 Std Speed: Y *ENG Displays charged DC bias determined by 021 Low Speed: K *ENG process control. 022 Low Speed: C *ENG [300 to 1000 / - / 1-V/step] 023 Low Speed: M...
  • Page 948 3. SP Mode Tables 001 Std Speed: K *ENG Displays the LD power determined by process 002 Std Speed: C *ENG control. 003 Std Speed: M *ENG [0 to 200 / - / 1%/step] 004 Std Speed: Y *ENG 021 Std Speed: K *ENG 022 Std Speed: C *ENG...
  • Page 949 Main SP Tables-3 013 Offset: Std Spd: M *ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 10/step] 014 Offset: Std Spd: Y *ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 10/step] 015 Offset: Low Spd: K *ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 10/step] 016 Offset: Low Spd: C *ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 10/step]...
  • Page 950 3. SP Mode Tables 3622 [Dev Pot :Set] 001 K *ENG 002 C *ENG Displays the development potential. 003 M *ENG [0 to 800 / - / 1V/step] 004 Y *ENG 021 K:BW *ENG 051 UpperLimit *ENG 052 UpperLimit *ENG Sets the development potential upper limit.
  • Page 951 Main SP Tables-3 041 Low Speed Slope:K *ENG 042 Low Speed Slope:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 128 / 1/step] 043 Low Speed Slope:M *ENG 044 Low Speed Slope:Y *ENG 051 Low Speed intercept:K *ENG 052 Low Speed intercept:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 7 / 1/step] 053 Low Speed intercept:M *ENG...
  • Page 952 3. SP Mode Tables Sets the forced supply threshold for toner density adjustment process control. 008 Force Supply Threshhold *ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.50 / 0.01mg/cm2/-kV/ step] 009 Supply(Upp Limit) *ENG Sets the upper or lower limit of supply quantity for toner density adjustment process control.
  • Page 953 Main SP Tables-3 001 Edge Detection Threshold :K *ENG 002 Edge Detection Threshold :C *ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / 2.5 / 0.1V/step] 003 Edge Detection Threshold :M *ENG 004 Edge Detection Threshold :Y *ENG 011 Edge Upper Limit *ENG [0 to 255 / 34 / 1point/step] 021 Edge Lower Limit *ENG [0 to 255 / 14 / 1point/step]...
  • Page 954 3. SP Mode Tables 015 ChargeDC: Pattern5: C *ENG [0 to 999 / 660 / 1V/step] 021 ChargeDC: Pattern1: M *ENG [0 to 999 / 240 / 1V/step] 022 ChargeDC: Pattern2: M *ENG [0 to 999 / 315 / 1V/step] 023 ChargeDC: Pattern3: M *ENG [0 to 999 / 390 / 1V/step]...
  • Page 955 Main SP Tables-3 DevelopmentDC: Pattern2: *ENG [0 to 999 / 175 / 1V/step] DevelopmentDC: Pattern3: *ENG [0 to 999 / 250 / 1V/step] DevelopmentDC: Pattern4: *ENG [0 to 999 / 325 / 1V/step] DevelopmentDC: Pattern5: *ENG [0 to 999 / 520 / 1V/step] 131 DevelopmentDC: Pattern1: Y *ENG [0 to 999 / 125 / 1V/step]...
  • Page 956 3. SP Mode Tables 022 Initial:C *ENG Sets the initial value of developer gamma. 023 Initial:M *ENG [0.50 to 2.55 / 0.80 / 0.01/step] 024 Initial:Y *ENG Sets on/off of developer gamma (environment correction). 031 Env Cor.(ON/OFF) *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 0:OFF, 1:ON Sets on/off of developer gamma (elapsed time correction).
  • Page 957 Main SP Tables-3 [-1.00 to 1.00 / 0.08 / 0.01mg/cm2/-kV/ 074 Environ Corr4:Bk *ENG step] 075 Environ Corr5:Bk *ENG [-1.00 to 1.00 / 0.10 / 0.01mg/cm2/-kV/ step] 076 Environ Corr6:Bk *ENG [-1.00 to 1.00 / 0.00 / 0.01mg/cm2/-kV/ 081 Environ Corr1:Col *ENG step] [-1.00 to 1.00 / 0.04 / 0.01mg/cm2/-kV/...
  • Page 958 3. SP Mode Tables 001 K *ENG 002 C *ENG Displays the latest developer starting voltage. [-300 to 300 / - / 1-V/-kV/step] 003 M *ENG 004 Y *ENG 3700 [New Unit Detection] Sets if new unit is detected or not. 001 ON/OFF Setting *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]...
  • Page 959 Main SP Tables-3 Sets the flag for new pressure roler manual settings. 015 Fusing Roller *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Sets the flag for new fusing belt manual settings. 016 Fusing Belt *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Sets the flag for new image transfer cleaning unit manual settings.
  • Page 960 3. SP Mode Tables 3710 [HST Concentration Control: Set] Sets the select mode if control is done or not with HST memory. 001 Control Method: Selection *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 0:NotUse, 1:Use 3711 [HST Concentration Control: K] 001 Vcnt *ENG Displays release check value stored in HST...
  • Page 961 Main SP Tables-3 Displays adjustment value stored in HST memory. 015 Adjustment: Vcnt Result *ENG [0 to 9 / - / 1/step] 3712 [HST Concentration Control: C] 001 Vcnt *ENG Displays release check value stored in HST memory. 002 Vt *ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.1V/step] Displays release check value stored in HST...
  • Page 962 3. SP Mode Tables [HST Concentration Control: M] 3713 Displays release check value stored in HST memory. 001 Vcnt *ENG Displays release check value stored in HST memory. 002 Vt *ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.1V/step] Displays release check value stored in HST memory.
  • Page 963 Main SP Tables-3 001 Vcnt *ENG Displays release check value stored in HST memory. 002 Vt *ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.1V/step] Displays release check value stored in HST memory. 003 Sensitivity: HL *ENG [1.22 to 3.77 / - / 0.01V/step] 004 Sensitivity: HM *ENG Displays release check value stored in HST...
  • Page 964 3. SP Mode Tables Displays adjustment time after adjustment. 002 AdjTime *ENG [0.00 to 654.00 / - / 0.01sec/step] Displays adjustment date (year, month, day, time) after adjustment. 003 DateTime *ENG [0 to 4212312459 / - / 1/step] Displays adjustment total counter after adjustment.
  • Page 965 Main SP Tables-3 002 AdjTime *ENG [0.00 to 654.00 / - / 0.01sec/step] 003 DateTime *ENG [0 to 4212312459 / - / 1/step] 004 TotalCounter *ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1pages/step] 3735 [AdjTime :Last5] 001 AdjID *ENG [0 to 99 / - / 1/step] 002 AdjTime *ENG [0.00 to 654.00 / - / 0.01sec/step]...
  • Page 966 3. SP Mode Tables 3739 [AdjTime :Last9] 001 AdjID *ENG [0 to 99 / - / 1/step] 002 AdjTime *ENG [0.00 to 654.00 / - / 0.01sec/step] 003 DateTime *ENG [0 to 4212312459 / - / 1/step] 004 TotalCounter *ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1pages/step] 3750 [ProCon SC :Last]...
  • Page 967 Main SP Tables-3 003 TotalCounter *ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1pages /step] 004 ProCon Result Code *ENG [0 to 99999999 / - / 1/step] 3753 [ProCon SC :Last3] 001 SC Number *ENG [0 to 999 / - / 1/step] 002 DateTime *ENG [0 to 4212312459 / - / 1/step]...
  • Page 968 3. SP Mode Tables 001 SC Number *ENG [0 to 999 / - / 1/step] 002 DateTime *ENG [0 to 4212312459 / - / 1/step] 003 TotalCounter *ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1pages/step] 004 ProCon Result Code *ENG [0 to 99999999 / - / 1/step] 3758 [ProCon SC :Last8]...
  • Page 969 Main SP Tables-3 Displays the waste toner volume from new Volume Count After Near toner bottle detection. *ENG Full [0.0 to 1000000.0 / - / 0.1/step] 006 Print Page After Replacement *ENG Displays the waste toner volume from new Volume Count After toner bottle detection.
  • Page 970 3. SP Mode Tables 3810 001 - *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1%/step] 002 - *ENG [-2000 to 2000 / 0 / 1%/step] 003 - *ENG [100 to 2000 / 100 / 1%/step] 3894 001 - *ENG 002 - *ENG 003 - *ENG...
  • Page 971 Main SP Tables-3 007 Counter7 *ENG 008 Counter8 *ENG 009 Counter9 *ENG 010 Counter10 *ENG 011 Counter11 *ENG Displays the total rotation of developement unit after the expiration of 5 minutes. 012 Counter12 *ENG [0 to 999999 / - / 1mm/step] 013 Counter13 *ENG 014 Counter14...
  • Page 972 3. SP Mode Tables 030 Counter30 *ENG 031 Counter31 *ENG 032 Counter32 *ENG 033 Counter33 *ENG 034 Counter34 *ENG Displays the total rotation of developement unit after the expiration of 5 minutes. 035 Counter35 *ENG [0 to 999999 / - / 1mm/step] 036 Counter36 *ENG 037 Counter37...

  • Page 973: Main Sp Tables-4

    Main SP Tables-4 Main SP Tables-4 SP4-XXX (Scanner) [Sub Scan Mag.Adjustment] 4008 Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed. 001 - *ENG [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0.0 / 0.1%/step] [L-Edge Regist Adjustment] 4010 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the sub-scan direction.
  • Page 974 3. SP Mode Tables 002 Lamp ON [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0:OFF, 1:ON [Scan] 4014 Execute the scanner free fun with each mode. 001 HP Detection Enable [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0:OFF, 1:ON 002 HP Detection Disable [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0:OFF, 1:ON [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0:OFF, 1:ON [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0:OFF, 1:ON...
  • Page 975 Main SP Tables-4 Selects the detect level. [0 to 8 / 4 / 1step] 002 Detection Level:face *ENG 0: lowest detection level 8: highest detection level Selects the level of the sub scan line correction when using the ARDF. [0 to 4 / 0 / 1step] 0: Off 003 Correction Level:face *ENG...
  • Page 976 3. SP Mode Tables 0: Scanned image 13: Grid pattern CMYK 1: Gradation main scan A 14: Color patch CMYK 2: Gradation main scan B 15: Gray pattern (1) 3: Gradation main scan C 16: Gray pattern (2) 4: Gradation main scan D 17: Gray Pattern (3) 5: Gradation sub scan (1) 18: Shading pattern...
  • Page 977 Main SP Tables-4 [ACC Target Density] 4501 Selects the ACC result. 001 Copy: K: Text *ENG 002 Copy: C: Text *ENG 003 Copy: M: Text *ENG 004 Copy: Y: Text *ENG [0 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step] 10: Darkest density 005 Copy: K: Photo *ENG 006 Copy: C: Photo...
  • Page 978 3. SP Mode Tables 001 Text:K *ENG 002 Text:C *ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step] 003 Text:M *ENG 004 Text:Y *ENG 005 Photo:K *ENG 006 Photo:C *ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step] 007 Photo:M *ENG 008 Photo:Y *ENG...
  • Page 979 Main SP Tables-4 014 GY Phase:R *ENG 015 GY Phase:G *ENG [-255 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] 016 GY Phase:B *ENG 017 GC Phase:Option *ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] 018 GC Phase:R *ENG 019 GC Phase:G *ENG [-255 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] 020 GC Phase:B...
  • Page 980 3. SP Mode Tables 038 MB Phase:R *ENG 039 MB Phase:G *ENG [-255 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] 040 MB Phase:B *ENG 041 MR Phase:Option *ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] 042 MR Phase:R *ENG 043 MR Phase:G *ENG [-255 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 981 Main SP Tables-4 008 Contrast: 1-255 *ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1step] Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 /step] (Weak-Strong) [Scan Apli:Txt] 4551 Sets the text MTF level of the scanner application. MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 (Weak- *ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1step]...
  • Page 982 3. SP Mode Tables Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 (Weak- *ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1step] Strong) 007 Brightness: 1-255 *ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1step] 008 Contrast: 1-255 *ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1step] Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1step] (Weak-Strong)
  • Page 983 Main SP Tables-4 [Scan Apli:Col Txt/Photo] 4570 Sets the color text/photo MTF level of the scanner application. MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 (Weak- *ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1step] Strong) Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 (Weak- *ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1step] Strong) 007 Brightness: 1-255 *ENG...
  • Page 984 3. SP Mode Tables Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1step] (Weak-Strong) [Fax Apli:Txt/Chart] 4580 Sets the text/chart MTF level of the fax application. MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 (Weak- *ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1step] Strong) Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 (Weak- *ENG...
  • Page 985 Main SP Tables-4 Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 (Weak- *ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1step] Strong) 007 Brightness: 1-255 *ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1step] 008 Contrast: 1-255 *ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1step] Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1step] (Weak-Strong)
  • Page 986 3. SP Mode Tables [Fax Apli:Original 2] 4585 Sets the original 2 MTF level of the fax application. MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 (Weak- *ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1step] Strong) Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 (Weak- *ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1step] Strong) 007 Brightness: 1-255 *ENG...
  • Page 987 Main SP Tables-4 [White Level Adjust] 4608 Adjusts the white peak level of black. 001 Bk *ENG [0 to 1024 / 784 / 1 / digit /step] [Gray Balance Set: R] 4609 Displays the adjustment value of the gray balance for red. 001 Book Scan *ENG [-512 to 511 / -89 / 1digit/step]...
  • Page 988 3. SP Mode Tables Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd red signal in the CCD 002 Latest: R Color 1200 circuit board (color printing speed). [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step] [Black Level Adj. Display] Displays the latest adjustment value of the black level.
  • Page 989 Main SP Tables-4 [Digital Gain Adjust] 4631 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red. 001 Latest: R Color 600 *ENG [0 to 511 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 Latest: R Color 1200 *ENG [Digital Gain Adjust] 4632 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green.
  • Page 990 3. SP Mode Tables [Black Level Adj. Display] 4654 Displays the last correct adjustment value of the black level. RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal Displays the black offset value for the even red signal in the CCD circuit board (color printing Last Correct Value: R Color *ENG speed).
  • Page 991 Main SP Tables-4 Displays the black offset value for the even blue signal in the CCD circuit board (color Last Correct Value: B Color *ENG printing speed). [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step] Displays the black offset value for the odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board (color printing Last Correct Value: B Color *ENG...
  • Page 992 3. SP Mode Tables Last Correct Value: B Color *ENG [0 to 511 / 0* / 1 digit/step] Last Correct Value: B Color *ENG 1200 [Black Level Adj. Display] 4673 Displays the factory setting values of the black level. RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment for the even red signal in the 001 Factory Setting: R Color 600...
  • Page 993 Main SP Tables-4 [Black Level Adj. Display] 4675 Displays the factory setting values of the black level. BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment for the even blue signal in the 001 Factory Setting: B Color 600 *ENG CCD circuit board (color printing speed).
  • Page 994 3. SP Mode Tables 001 Factory Setting: B Color 600 *ENG [0 to 511 / - / 1 digit/step] Factory Setting: B Color *ENG 1200 [ADF Adjustment] 4688 Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF. 001 Density *ENG [50 to 150 / 100 / 1%/step]...
  • Page 995 Main SP Tables-4 [Black Level Peak Read] 4693 Displays the peak level of the black level scanning. RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal 001 R Color 600 [0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step] 002 R Color 1200 [Black Level Peak Read] Displays the peak level of the black level scanning.
  • Page 996 3. SP Mode Tables 4804 [Home Position] 001 - Executes the scanner HP detection. 4806 [Carriage Save] Moves the carriage from the scanner home position. 001 - Dust may fall through the DF exposure glass. Therefore, do this SP when you transport the machine a long distance.
  • Page 997 Main SP Tables-4 002 Latest: R Color 1200 [0 to 1023 / - / 1digit/step] 003 Latest: G Color 600 [0 to 1023 / - / 1digit/step] 004 Latest: G Color 1200 [0 to 1023 / - / 1digit/step] 005 Latest: BkE [0 to 1023 / - / 1digit/step] 006 Latest: BkO [0 to 1023 / - / 1digit/step]...
  • Page 998 3. SP Mode Tables [Disp ACC Data] This SP outputs the final data read at the end of ACC execution. 4902 A zero is returned if there was an error reading the data. [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step] 001 R_DATA1 *ENG Photo C Patch Level 1 (8-bit)
  • Page 999 Main SP Tables-4 [Total Regulation:Photo Copy] 4931 Sets the total regulation value. 001 FC 1 *ENG [0 to 400 / 240 / 1 /step] 002 FC 2 *ENG [0 to 400 / 260 / 1 /step] 003 Mono *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 1 /step] 004 Color Process *ENG [0 to 400 / 200 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 1000 3. SP Mode Tables Selects the Highlight correction level. [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step] 001 Sensitivity Selection *ENG 0: weakest sensitivity 9: strongest sensitivity Selects the range level of Highlight correction. [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step] 002 Range Selection *ENG 0: weakest skew correction,...

  • Page 1001: Main Sp Tables-5

    Main SP Tables-5 Main SP Tables-5 SP5-XXX (Mode) [mm/inch Display Selection] 5024 Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes. 0: mm (Europe/Asia) 001 0:mm 1:inch *CTL 1: inch (USA) [Accounting Counter] Selects the counting method. 5045 NOTE: The counting method can be changed only once, regardless of whether the counter value is negative or positive.
  • Page 1002 3. SP Mode Tables [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *CTL 0: OFF 1: ON [Toner Remaining Icon Display Change] 5061 Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon on the LCD. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display...

This manual is also suitable for:

Mp c305spf

Table of Contents